HomeMy WebLinkAboutOlin Hall B01 and 101 Lab Renovations Specifications
OLIN HALL B01, 101
LAB RENOVATIONS
Project Manual & Specifications
June 2, 2021
Owner
Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect
Chiang | O’Brien Architects, DPC 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATIONS Page 1
Instructions to Bidders Bid Proposal Submission Form General Conditions and Exhibits Supplemental Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements
Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 22 Fixed Equipment Inventory Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATIONS Page 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Section 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate Clad Architectural Cabinets DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Section 09 01 90.52 Maintenance Repainting Section 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Section 22 05 18 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping Section 22 05 23.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping
Section 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Section 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Section 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation Section 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping Section 22 15 13 General-Service Compressed-Air Piping Section 22 42 16.16 Commercial Sinks Section 22 66 00 Chemical-Waste Systems for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities DIVISION 23 – HVAC Section 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Section 23 09 23 Building Automation Control System Section 23 09 25 Building Automation and Control System Communications and Interoperability Section 23 31 13 Metal Ducts
Section 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories Section 23 33 46 Flexible Ducts Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units Section 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATIONS Page 3
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling DRAWINGS G001 Cover Sheet A101 B01 - Demo & Equipment Plans A102 101 - Demo & Equipment Plans A151 B01 Reflected Ceiling Plan A152 101 Reflected Ceiling Plan A201 Equipment Matrix - Room B01 A202 Equipment Matrix - Room 101
A203 Existing Photos - B01 A204 Existing Photos - 101 P001 Drawing Index, Symbol Lists & Abbrevs. P101 Partial Floor Plan - Lab B01 P102 Partial Floor Plans - Lab 101 M001 Drawing Index, Symbols & Abbrevs.
M101 B01 Floor Plans M102 101 Floor Plans M601 Schedules & Details M701 Controls E001 Drawing Index, Schedules, Symbol Lists & Notes E101 Partial Electrical Plans - Lab B01 E102 Partial Electrical Plans - Lab 101
END OF DOCUMENT
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: Chiang | O’Brien Architects, DPC 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 1. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid Documents provided electronically by the Owner will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Proposal Certification Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements", and Supplemental Conditions. (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. Bid Documents are available electronically in the eBuilder Bid Portal under the Bid Package Invitation – Invitation Documents Tab. Dataflow, Inc. maintains the current set of Documents and all addenda and is the contracted supplier for printed plans and specifications for this project. Contact Dataflow at CUProjects@goDataflow.com. Bid Documents Terms of Use / Disclaimer - By accessing and/or using the Cornell University Document Files, You accept without limitation or qualifications, the following Terms of Use: a. Cornell University grants You the permission to use and view the Document Files subject to these Terms of Use.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2
b. Except in connection with preparing your bid, You may not modify, copy, transmit, display, reproduce, publish, license, create derivative works from, transfer, or sell any information, materials, drawings, content, products or services from the Document Files (together "Content") in any form without Cornell University's prior written permission. You may print out a copy or download Content solely for Your internal use. In doing so, you may not remove or alter, or cause to be removed or altered, any copyright, trademark, trade name, service mark, or any other proprietary notice or legend appearing on any of the Content. c. You may not provide parts of or full sets of Document Files to any planhouse or online document repositories. d. The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively the "Trademarks") displayed on the Document Files are registered and unregistered Trademarks of Cornell University and others. Nothing contained on the Document Files should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark displayed on the Document Files without the written permission of Cornell University or such party that may own the Trademark. Your use of the Trademarks displayed on the Document Files, or any other content, except as provided in these Terms of Use, are strictly prohibited. 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall acquaint themselves with location conditions as they exist, as well as the character of the necessary work to be carried out under the proposed Contract. A Pre-Bid Zoom meeting will be scheduled and include: a review of project related information, an opportunity to ask and receive responses to Bidder questions, and make such inquiries as are necessary to fully understand the subject facilities, physical conditions and/or restrictions attendant to the work under the Contract. b. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. c. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. d. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder covenants and affirms that the Bidder has carefully examined all of the Bid Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, as well as posed any questions associated with the Site, and that Bidder is satisfied as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3
3. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, Bidder shall at once enter the item in the Q&A Board of the eBuilder Bid Portal and an Addenda with written instructions will be sent to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing and entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Q&A Board. Inquiries received in advance of the deadline established at the Pre-Bid conference will be given consideration. 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 1:00PM, July 6, 2021, in Conference Room B26A of the Humphreys Service Building or via Zoom at: https://cornell.zoom.us/j/97225840677?pwd=V1lIU0NoZDlTUDNzbTkwQnY5bmFGUT09&from=addon A pre-bid walk-through will follow and begin at Olin Main Entrance. The meeting will be to review project related information and respond to Bidder questions. The pre-Bid Conference is designed to assist Bidders in understanding the Contract Documents, the opportunity to pose clarifying questions or make inquiries regarding Contract Documents. Results will be published in an Addendum. 5. BID SUBMISSION Bid Submissions must include the following: a. Base Bid entered into the eBuilder Portal broken down per the Bid Scope Tab Schedule of Values (Step 1: Bid Form of the Response Form tab). b. Additional Required Information: 1. Bid Proposal Certification Form 2. Bid Bond 3. Bond Surety Company 4. Bonding Rate for Change Orders 5. Proposed Project Team and Resumes 6. Proposed Project Schedule 7. Substitutions c. Bid Proposal Certification Form: The Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be signed by the Principal(s) or Officer(s) legally authorized to bind the Bidder, and to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificates included in the Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name should be fully and accurately stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer; Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4
d. Bid Bond: Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond electronically via the eBuilder Bid Portal in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 13 below.
6. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes.
7. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes.
8. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations.
9. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax-exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 10. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal Bid Scope form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal, a list of the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5
11. UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. If requested, a form will be attached to these instructions and will need to be completed and uploaded to the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. All Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below prior to the execution of the Contract. 12. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted on the form supplied with these instructions. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 13. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested by the Owner and are included in the General Requirements. They will be listed in the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal. All Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 14. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Base Bid shall be prepared and electronically submitted via the eBuilder Bid Portal. All required fields and attachments in the eBuilder Bid Portal must be completed. b. Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be prepared electronically submitted as an attachment via the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6
c. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals shall be submitted through the eBuilder Bid Portal no later than 3:00 PM on July 22, 2021. d. Bid Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, written, electronic or telephonic proposals, or modifications will be considered. 15. BID OPENING a. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals will be opened electronically via eBuilder Bid Portal. Responsive Bid results will be posted to the Facilities Contracts website at: https://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 16. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible base bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement. d. Bidder expressly warrants and commits that its Proposal shall remain unchanged and in full force and effect at the Owner’s option for a period of not less than ninety (90) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. Bidders may submit, recall, modify, resubmit or withdraw their Bids through the eBuilder Bid Portal up until the Bid Due Date and Time. 17. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-7
18. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BONDS Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. 19. START OF WORK a. Work at the site shall be started within five (5) calendar days from the date of issuance of written authorization to proceed and shall achieve substantial completion of the project no later than September 15, 2021. 1. NOTE: Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall: i. Furnish the Owner with fully executed and satisfactory Payment and Performance bonds. No on-site construction activities may commence until executed and satisfactory bonds are in place for the subject project. ii. Furnish the Owner with safety plan related to COVID-19 pandemic b. The construction schedule and completion are critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur.
20. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Bidders must acknowledge in Step 3 of the Bid Response in the eBuilder Bid Portal each Addendum and/or Bulletin issued during the bidding period. 21. REQUIRED POST-AWARD SUBMISSIONS BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER a. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms (2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors (3) Six-Month Workforce Projection b. Upon Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-1
OLIN HALL B01, 101 LAB RENOVATIONS Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM
Vendor Name:
Type of Firm, State of Incorporation if Applicable
Street Address, City, State, Zip
Having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division
1 - "General Requirements"), Supplemental Conditions, the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated June 2, 2021 prepared by Chiang | O’Brien Architects, DPC, 217 North Aurora Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents. 1. Receipt of the Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications has been acknowledged in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 2. Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (M/WBEs) Facilities and Campus Services supports Cornell University’s ongoing commitment to encourage business opportunities and diversity among its vendor community by promoting minority owned and controlled business’ development as a shared responsibility. The University’s intention is to create and expand opportunities for minority, women, veteran, LGBTQ, small and locally owned businesses
through construction labor opportunities and the procurement of goods and services. Positive good faith efforts to advance the University’s objectives shall be made by all Contractors, engaging, and maximizing these diverse enterprise goals, and to positively drive Cornell's economic impact. Cornell University Diversity Council Statement: "Cultivate partnerships with the widest spectrum of Off-Campus entities and include a fully diverse range of Off-Campus participants in Cornell's events, contracts, services, and initiatives." 3. Milestone Dates a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within five (5) calendar days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed and to achieve substantial
completion of the project no later than September 7, 2021, with final completion no later than September 15, 2021. b. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. Contractor shall attach a Project Duration Schedule to this form that meets the duration established.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-2
c. Following are additional Milestone Dates:
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" consistent with the agreed upon Construction Duration showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional
information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 16, 1.3, A. 4. Proposed Principal Subcontractors a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the list submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields subject to the following provisions:
i. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. 5. Contractor Team: a. The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any Project Manager or Superintendent provide in the eBuilder Bid Portal submission to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. Bonds
a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of a minimum of 10% of Bid Amount is attached to the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. b. Performance and Payment Bonds. Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the undersigned expressly agrees if awarded the Contract, to deliver to Owner executed "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such forms as are acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. c. Such bonds will be furnished by the Surety entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields d. Bonding Rate for Change Orders has been entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-3
7. Bid Scope - Schedule of Values a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values"
including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating to the total Contract Sum submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 8. Substitutions a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1. c. Any Substitutions are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. e. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. 9. Unit Price Schedule
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices form uploaded in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields prior to the execution of the Contract.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-4
10. Acceptance
a. The undersigned agrees that the amount submitted for the Base Bid and any Alternates and Unit Pricing along with the required attachments in the Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal have been reviewed and are accurate. b. It is understood and agreed that the Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. c. Upon acceptance of Bidder’s Proposal, Bidder expressly agrees and affirms to hold its unchanged Bid Proposal for ninety (90) calendar days. The undersigned will execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. Nothing contained herein shall preclude Bidder and Owner from mutually agreeing upon a Contract based upon the unchanged Bid Proposal if the time elapsed from Award is in excess of ninety (90) calendar days.
d. The undersigned acknowledges the following Addendum(s) (if applicable):
e. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. f. The undersigned agrees to furnish Owner satisfactory and executed Performance and Payment Bonds prior to the commencement of any Work on-site. g. The undersigned acknowledges as Contractor to be and remain exclusively in control of the
Project site and Work, as well as the Project’s Health & Safety Plan, measures, and/or protocols, for the duration of construction activities. i. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Supplemental Conditions to the Contract surrounding Contractor Response and Health & Safety Protocols for COVID-19, or other viral, bacterial, or microbial presence (as applicable). ii. The undersigned acknowledges that no one will be permitted on the job site until the Health & Safety Plan has been submitted.
Addendum No. __ dated ____.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-5
The following documentation is required to be submitted electronically in the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields
This Form with Proposed Milestone Schedule – signed and executed
Bid Bond
Proposed Project Team Resumes
Bidder Project Qualifications
(Bidder) By: Title: Business Address: Dated:
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-6
CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION
By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed, directly or indirectly, by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder to any other bidder or any competitor prior to opening. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated:
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-7
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER
I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the
_____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General
Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the
bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that
his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed and
executed for and on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) Dated:
Rev 4-2021
G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR OLIN HALL B01, 101 LAB RENOVATIONS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
i Rev 4-2021
GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK
Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11 Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12
ii Rev 4-2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04 Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21
ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26
iii Rev 4-2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26 ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27 Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28 ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30 ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31
ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32
iv Rev 4-2021
EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary
B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation
1 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner
A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the sounder technique or workmanship, or better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner directs otherwise so directs in writing.
B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern.
2 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations
A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise.
Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others or alternatives may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00.
3 Rev 4-2021
B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision(s) or redesign(s), and all new drawings and details required thereto shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the
Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the Work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner.
4 Rev 4-2021
Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the Contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems appropriate and adequate to account
for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of Contractor bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the Project Schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent, sufficiently stable to secure the required payment and performance bonds, and is sufficiently experienced in and competent to perform the subject Work or retain qualified subcontractors to perform elements of the Work pursuant to the Project’s plans and specifications; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, accounted for weather days, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work.
5 Rev 4-2021
Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or
conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should Contractor’s failure to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Contractor will have access to view and download the Bid Documents in eBuilder. B. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work with the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner along with the As-Builts at the completion of the Work. Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work
The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work.
6 Rev 4-2021
Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the Work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized
representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the Work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided.
7 Rev 4-2021
Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and
examination of the Work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the Work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance
No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom.
8 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes
A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order and approve changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field
and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as-built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit.
9 Rev 4-2021
3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent
directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general conditions to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-up Percentages 1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor: Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%). 4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments
due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay.
10 Rev 4-2021
6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage
include, without limit: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentage will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes and shall constitute a full payment for both the Work covered or arising from the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any and all impacts, known or unknown, or delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor expressly waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records
relating thereto.
11 Rev 4-2021
Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner
or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order; B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and the Architect. F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy
the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith. G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section.
12 Rev 4-2021
Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder
Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above and processed via E-Builder. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the dates of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the times for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure substantial and full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the times for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on the approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York;
2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather.
13 Rev 4-2021
G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or
2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 – TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work
The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor.
14 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure
A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed
to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, known or unknown, including time extensions, or damages as a result of said order, work, action, or omission.
15 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting
A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors.
C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work.
16 Rev 4-2021
E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any
damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational
disease, public health statistics or information, and injury requiring medical attention, pursuat to government authority, or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form.
17 Rev 4-2021
C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (e.g., special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for
review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. 4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment. The form can be found at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or
subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken.
18 Rev 4-2021
Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply
the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default on the part of the Contractor. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability benefit or other employee benefit laws. B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to fully comply with and honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final
acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000.
19 Rev 4-2021
2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations
under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the Work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors.
20 Rev 4-2021
D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and
shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense.
Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner
A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract.
Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards
A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty
(30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work
21 Rev 4-2021
together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent
that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction.
22 Rev 4-2021
Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment
and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule.
2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment
23 Rev 4-2021
of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit,
executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the E-Builder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract
approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project.
24 Rev 4-2021
B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits
Exhibit H and complies with the following: 1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment. 2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment. 3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity (temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an environment. 4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage. 5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and
equipment incorporated into the Work. F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University.
25 Rev 4-2021
Section 12.03 – Retention A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the Work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part
security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06. B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well. Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of contemporaneous or subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current
reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner.
26 Rev 4-2021
a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications. b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in
accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub-subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and
inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor.
27 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption
A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS
Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.
28 Rev 4-2021
Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be
maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (Caterina McFadden) shall be recognized by the Contractor. ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES
Section 16.01 – Definitions The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended.
29 Rev 4-2021
Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the
implementation of MBE and WBE programs. These requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement. C. For purposes of this procurement: Facilities and Campus Services supports Cornell University’s ongoing commitment to encourage business opportunities and diversity among its vendor community by promoting minority owned and controlled business’ development as a shared responsibility. The University’s intention is to create and expand opportunities for minority, women, veteran, LGBTQ, small and locally owned businesses through construction labor opportunities and the procurement of goods and services. Positive good faith efforts to advance the University’s objectives shall be made by all Contractors, engaging, and maximizing these diverse enterprise goals, and to positively drive Cornell's economic impact. Cornell University Diversity Council Statement: "Cultivate partnerships with the widest spectrum of Off-Campus entities and include a fully diverse range of Off-Campus participants in Cornell's events, contracts, services, and initiatives." Section 16.03 – Reports and Records
A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Reports when requested by the Owner. 1. MWBE Utilization Report 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report B. The Contractor shall submit an Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a single monthly report, or as requested by the Owner, inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the use of MWBE businesses in the Contract.
30 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files
used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”, Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release of Information The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news
releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager.
31 Rev 4-2021
Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell
University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of Owner's Name on Non-Work Related Content The Contractor shall not use or permit on the job site, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other content unrelated to the Contracted Work, or any representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative. ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within
the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077.
32 Rev 4-2021
CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract Change Order Forms
Instructions to Change Order Documentation
Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request.
Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields at time of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract.
EXHIBIT "A"
EXHIBIT "A"
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY
DATE:
PCO #
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1 DIRECT COST OF WORK:
NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TO TAL
PERFORMING WORK COST
TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0
TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B"
FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS
Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title:
Date Contract Date
Project Contract Price
Address Net Extras and Deductions
City Adjusted Contract Price
County Amount Previously Paid
State Balance Due - Final Payment
The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract.
In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "C"
GUARANTEE
Date:
In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell
University dated , we hereby guarantee
the as found in the specifications
for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title)
from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from
, the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) (COMPANY) By: Title:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
1
MWBE Utilization Report
PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION e-Builder Project No. Project Name: Contract Value:
Contractor Name and Address:
Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date:
Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email:
PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE
(List your firm if also MBE or WBE)
Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order
Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor or Supplier Start and End Dates
(Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list) Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title:
Signature: Date:
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
2
MWBE Utilization Report
PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year:
General Contractor, Subcontractor, Sub-
Subcontractor, or Vendor Trade
Dollar Value of
SubContract or
Purchase Order
MBE,
WBE, or
N/A
% of Total
Contract
TOTALS 0 0
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II
SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS
Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT:
Name of Prime Contract Bidder:
Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code):
Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number):
MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination
EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary)
OFFICER OF FIRM:
Name and Title: Date:
Signature:
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III
EXHIBIT "E"
LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:TRADE:
EFFECTIVE DATE:
EXPIRATION DATE:
Base Hourly Rate:$
Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour
F.I.C.A.
Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
*Worker's Compensation
*Bodity Injury & Property Damage
Disability
TOTAL %
Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % =$
*
Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour
Vacation
Health & Welfare
Pension
Annuity
Education / Training
Industry
Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $
Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $
Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices:$
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
Signature of Authorized Representative:
Print Name:
Print Title:
I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance
with actual and true cost incurred.
Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience
modifications have been applied against manual rate.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "F”
STORED MATERIALS INVOICING
DOCUMENTATION
PROJECT TITLE:
CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:SUBCONTRACTOR:
REASON FOR REQUEST:
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________DATE:
1 Material Identification
Description:
Quantity:
Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored:
2 Material Value
Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value.$
3 Certificate of Insurance
Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name
"Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials.
4 Transfer of Title
The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the
time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains
responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and
providing of all warranties.
Signed:
Date:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "G"
Contractor Performance
Evaluation
Project Information
Project Name:____________________________________________Date Of Evaluation___________________
Project Number___________________________Evaluators;
Project Team_____________________________
Campus_________________________________
Project Start Date_________________________Substantial Completion________________
Contractor______________________________________________Prequalification Status_________________
Original Contract Amount__________________________________Total Change Order Amount_____________
Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________Initial Evaluation_____
Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________Final Evaluation_____
Type Of Contract
Prime Contractor___Subcontractor___Construction Manager___
Project Comments/Description
Performance Evaluation
Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating.
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
1 Quality of Workmanship
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work
a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications
b. Workmanship quality and accuracyc. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity
d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition
e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel
Comments:
2 Scheduling/Productivity
Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and
meeting contract schedules and milestones
a. Project schedule quality and completenessb. Controlling of project schedule
c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule
d. Material deliveries to support project schedulee. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones
f. Productivity of work force
g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues.
Comments:
3 Subcontractor Management
Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating
subcontractors(if no subcontractors rate overall management performance)
Comments:
3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation
For contractor information only
a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
4 MBE/WBE Participation
Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this
project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors
Comments:
5 Safety
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safetya. Timely submission of site specific safety program
b. Knowledge of OSHA standards
c. Implementation of safety rules and regulationsd. Promotion and creation of safety awareness
e. Daily overall housekeeping
f. Safety record
g. Response to safety concerns
h. Awareness of public safety
Comments:
6 Contract Administration
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract
administration as per criteria below
a. Timely submission of complet and correct
documentation required for insurance and bond
b. Change order processing
c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings,
and change orders
d. Subcontractor payments made promptlye. Timely submission of complete and correct payment
applications
f. Quality of paperwork
Comments:
7 Working Relationships
Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties
(Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.)
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
8 Supervisory Personnel Rating
Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory
personnel and project management staff
Comments:
9 Contract Close-Out
Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project
a. Timely completion of all punchlist items
b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders
c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's,
As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety)
d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion
of any outstanding audit questionsComments:
Summary Sheet
Project:___________________________________________
Contractor:________________________________________
Rating Per Weight
Performance Categories Category %Scoring
1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00%0
2 Scheduling 0 10.00%0
3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00%0
4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00%0
5 Safety 0 10.00%0
6 Contract Administration 0 10.00%0
7 Working Relationships 0 10.00%0
8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00%0
9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00%0
Over All Rating 0
Rating Reference
Fails to achieve expectation 1
Needs improvement 2
Fully achieves expectation 3
Frequently exceeds expectation 4
Consistently exceeds expectatio 5
OWNER COMMENTS:
OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings:
CONTRACTOR COMMENTS:
(To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT PATHOGENS CONTAGIONS COVID-19
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE
TO PATHOGENS, CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS
In response to the public health emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and
guidelines from civil authorities including, but not limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC,
OSHA and New York State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities and
Guidelines”) surrounding health and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission of
the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance for construction related
work. Contractors and businesses are further required to comple with applicable “COVID-19 Authorities
and Guidelines” mandatory directives and health and safety practices issued.
1.0 These Supplemental Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may also apply to
any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating
protective health and safety measures for worker safety, the general public, and any personnel
connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project.
1.1 The purpose of this document is to set forth recommended elements and practices to
safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University.
1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses,
entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor
obligations include modification of all their existing protocols and practices as necessary
to adhere to the most current modifications to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”.
2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions
and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the
Contractor’s exclusive control over the job site, subcontractors, project labor, Health & Safety
Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means
associated with any and all of the foregoing elements.
2.1 Cornell University possesses neither control nor any right of control over the job site,
project labor, health & safety practices or programs, or methods and means of advancing
the Contracted Work.
2.2 These Supplemental Conditions are provided to the Contractor for the attainment of
Contractor’s fully compliant health and safety measures and practices communicated by
applicable civil authorities as requirements, recommendations, and/or guidance necessary
to engage in qualifying construction activities.
2.3 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General
Conditions and General Requirements shall remain and include, but not limited to:
2.3.1 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required at all times to guard
the safety and health of all persons on and in the vicinity of the work site
2
2.3.2 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required to comply with all
applicable rules, regulations, codes, and bulletins of the New York State
Department of Labor and the standards imposed under the Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended (“OSHA”) and New York State
Executive Orders
2.3.3 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are also required to comply with
all applicable job site safety requirements
2.3.4 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must comply with all County,
City or State of New York safety requirements for projects within the City or State
of New York constructed in accordance with the applicable Building Code, and
contractors are required to provide written Safety Plans for the site demonstrating
how all applicable safety requirements are to be implemented for all elements of
the Work for the duration of the contract.
3.0 Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers are required to adhere to “COVID-19
Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread of COVID-19,
pathogens, or contagions (as applicable).
3.1 To that end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the
protective measures and protocols Contractor shall employ on the Project in response to
“COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure
or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable).
3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior to start of Construction Activity on the
Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures and practices
are in place, not for substantive review or approval.
3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and
their subcontractors and suppliers must remain current with, and immediately implement
updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may
request updated elements of the Contractor’s written safety plan to address evolving best
practices for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”.
3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell immediately upon discovery of any employees of their
firm, or subcontractors, or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus
that have been confirmed to have COVID-19 contagion.
4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the Plan:
4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov
4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19 can be found at
www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf
4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication
(Global Harmonization) Standard at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home
4.4 Centers for Disease Control -- https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html
3
5.0 Project Closure:
5.1 Where work is suspended on a project, contractors are directed to follow any additional
project shut-down protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to,
photographs, securing the work site and project status narrative.
6.0 Contractor expressly agrees to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the
implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety Protocols and Measures as set forth in
applicable and then current Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to
the foregoing and Contractor submission of the Plan are conditions precedent to engage in any on-
site construction activity.
JUNE 2, 2021
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR OLIN HALL B01, 101
LAB RENOVATIONS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK ....................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS ........................................................... 2 1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS .............................................. 2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................................................. 1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ................................................................ 1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ................................................................................. 2
1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION ............................................................................ 2
1.5 PARKING .............................................................................................................. 2
1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................. 3 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION............................. 4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS ..................................................................... 4 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ......................... 5
1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. .................................... 5
1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...................................................................................... 6 1.12 WORKING HOURS ............................................................................................. 6
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 6
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 6
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................... 2
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST ................................................................................................. 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2 1.6 PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 3 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL .......................................................... 3
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS .............................................................................. 4
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS ................................................................................................ 6
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ............................................................................. 7 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ............................................................ 8 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................... 8
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 8
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 8
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ........................................................................ 1
JUNE 2, 2021
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING ................................................................... 1
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ..................................................................................... 3
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)........................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ........................................................................................ 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.4 PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 1
1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 2
1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ........................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ......................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................... 1 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ............................................................................. 1
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................... 2
1.5 SUBMISSIONS ..................................................................................................... 3
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 DISTRIBUTION ................................................................................................... 3
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ............................................................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE .................................................. 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .............................................................................................. 3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA ................................................................................................ 3
1.5 SAMPLES.............................................................................................................. 4
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS ...... 5 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ......................................................................... 6 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................. 9
1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .......................................................................... 10
1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS .................................................................................. 12
JUNE 2, 2021
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS............................................................... 12 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES .................................................................................... 12
1.13 DISTRIBUTION ................................................................................................. 13
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED........................................................................................... 13
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ........................................................................................ 13
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY...................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ..................................... 1 1.3 ASBESTOS ........................................................................................................... 2 1.4 LEAD ..................................................................................................................... 3 1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION................................................................................. 3
1.6 SITE VISITS.......................................................................................................... 3
1.7 CONFINED SPACE ............................................................................................. 3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ........................................................................................ 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................... 1 1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE ...................................... 2
1.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION .................................................................................. 2
1.7 DUST CONTROL ................................................................................................. 2 1.8 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ....................................................... 3 1.9 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK .................... 3
1.10 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS ......................................................... 4
1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ......................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ................................................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION .......................................................................................... 1 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES .................................................................... 1 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................. 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 1
JUNE 2, 2021
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES ................................................................................ 1
1.2 INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.3 COMPLIANCE ..................................................................................................... 1
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 2
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ........................................................ 1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................................................. 2 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 2 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................... 4
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ................................................................................. 4
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ............................................................ 5
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ........................................................................................... 17
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................... 17
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL.......................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION .................................................... 1 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS ........................................................ 2
1.4 TESTING ............................................................................................................... 3
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................... 3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ............................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ....................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................... 1
2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES........................................................... 1
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION.................................................................. 1 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ..................................................................................... 3 2.5 SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................ 3 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES ........................................................................... 4
2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL .................................................................. 5
2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ........................... 5
JUNE 2, 2021
2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ..................................................... 5 2.10 SECURITY ............................................................................................................ 5
2.11 FIELD OFFICES ................................................................................................... 5
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 PREPARATION.................................................................................................... 5 3.2 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 6 3.3 REMOVAL ............................................................................................................ 6
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ................................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ....................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................... 1
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER ........................... 1 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR ................................................................ 2 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION ................................................... 3 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................. 4
2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES ......................................................... 4
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 REMOVAL ............................................................................................................ 4
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION........................................................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING .......................................................... 1
1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE ............................................................................................ 1 1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE ..................................................... 2 1.5 PROTECTION ...................................................................................................... 3 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ......................................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING .................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2 1.4 WARRANTIES ..................................................................................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 4
JUNE 2, 2021
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 INSPECTION ........................................................................................................ 4
3.2 PREPARATION.................................................................................................... 5
3.3 PERFORMANCE.................................................................................................. 5
3.4 CLEANING ........................................................................................................... 7
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT ....................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ............................................................................................... 3 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................... 5
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY.................................................................. 1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................... 1
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................... 2
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES............................................... 3 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS .............................................. 4 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 6 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ............................................... 6
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.......................................................................... 7
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 7
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 7
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ............................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 2 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 3
JUNE 2, 2021
1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED ................................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................... 4 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS..................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS ..................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES................................... 1
1.3 RECORDING ........................................................................................................ 1 1.4 SUBMITTAL ........................................................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work to be Done
1. Olin B01
a. Provide fire-rated poly protection to adjacent space during construction. Remove existing equipment, furnishings and electric as noted.
b. Patch walls and repaint area of work, including cabinets, frames and doors, and reinstall ceiling, grid, and any equipment to pre-renovation conditions.
c. Relocate and install owner furnished items and equipment as noted on drawings.
d. Provide new coat hooks and wall mounted lab safety glasses box.
e. New and reconfigured plumbing, HVAC, and electric.
2. Olin 101
a. Remove existing shelving and modify countertop as noted. Remove existing equipment, furnishings and electric as noted.
b. Patch walls and repaint area of work, including cabinets, frames and doors, and reinstall ceiling, grid, and any equipment to pre-renovation conditions.
c. Install new flooring and base. Add compressed air, flexible duct and plywood above sink, provide correct ADA clearances for all equipment.
d. New and reconfigured plumbing, HVAC, and electric.
B. The Scope of the Work
1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity.
2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the
work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus, machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity, highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract.
1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including providing labor, materials, and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract work with work performed under others contracts.
B. Concurrent / Future Work:
1. Work is being done in work in Rooms 201 and 341.
C. New York State Electric & Gas (NYSEG):
1. Contractor shall be responsible for the project management of NYSEG work including coordinating any scheduling associated with the Project.
2. The Owner shall be responsible for the cost associated with the work to be performed by NYSEG. No NYSEG costs shall be carried in the Contractor’s bid.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS
A. Owner provided furniture, equipment and sink as described in construction documents as OFCI (Owner Furnished Contractor Installed).
1. Thermal Spallation
2. Wooden Work bench with vice
3. Large HTL Reactor with casting
4. Electric control box
5. Steel moveable toolbox
6. Fume hood
7. ADA sink
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
8. Refrigerators
9. Morgan Milwaukee Bench Vise
10. Some noted on plans, wall cabinets.
B. The Contractor shall receive, unload, store and install Owner furnished equipment as shown on the plans and called for in the Specifications.
C. Storage
1. Upon written acknowledgment by Contractor of receipt in proper condition, the Contractor shall maintain responsibility for proper storage and protection of the equipment. Provide insurance for the Owner-furnished products up to the time of Final Acceptance by the Owner.
D. Receiving and Unloading
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for logging in, checking and verifying receipt of items and shall be responsible for confirming that the quantities and condition of the materials are appropriate for installation and the completion of the Work of the project.
2. The Contractor shall note any damage and/or short count on the Bill of Loading for any Owner Furnished Equipment received at the storage facility, such listing of damages or short count being required to establish the Owner's potential claim against the carrier. The Contractor shall also notify the Owner directly on any such damage and/or short count.
3. Unload Owner Furnished Equipment at the job site using necessary care and equipment as required to handle the equipment in a safe manner.
4. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers necessary to handle, receive and install Owner Furnished Equipment.
5. Install Owner Furnished Equipment as called for in the Drawings or in these Specifications.
E. Installation
1. Install products in conformance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2. Provide interconnecting structures, equipment, piping, electrical and instrumentation work, finish painting, and appurtenances to achieve a complete and functional system.
F. Use of Materials
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the use of Owner provide materials in an efficient manner in accordance with industry standards and best practices to reduce waste materials.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 11 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations.
B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times.
C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges.
D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area.
E. The Contractor shall post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required.
F. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative.
G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work.
H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the
normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces.
J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel
lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work.
K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative.
1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES
A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns, emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal operating standards.
B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised
that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist.
1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION
A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the time of construction.
1.5 PARKING
A. The Owner may designate an area for parking of essential Contractor vehicles on the project
site.
B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade persons from the designated parking area to the construction site, as necessary.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Caterina McFadden) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee
Form” for each permit requested. This form may be found at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm.
D. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having jurisdiction, as follows:
1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area.
2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc.
3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements.
4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site.
E. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore.
1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding.
B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased.
C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses.
D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative.
E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department.
G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative.
H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY.
1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION
A. General
1. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS.
2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment
locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered.
3. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes.
4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have
been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect.
B. Interference
1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention.
1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS
A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions:
1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required.
2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades.
3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications.
1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC.
A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed.
1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC.
A. Before Submitting Proposal
1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work.
2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building.
3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities.
B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area
1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building.
2. Inspect all adjacent work.
C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement
1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings.
2. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding.
D. Existing or Archived Drawings
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing
current conditions.
1.11 STAND DOWN DATES
A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the following dates and hours is required.
1. Student and Campus Life
Residence Halls Open
August 18-20, 2021
No deliveries, no hauling materials into or out of the project site.
All work to be contained to the fenced area of the project site.
1.12 WORKING HOURS
A. Normal work hours are 7AM-dusk Monday-Saturday except during above noted restrictions.
This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted.
B. During Construction periods, no work shall take place prior to 9AM in a Residence Hall, Fraternity, Co-Op, Sorority, or any type of Housing Unit. Residence Halls require 72 hours notification to the Student & Academic Services representative prior to entering a Residence Hall or Student Room. This does not apply to Fraternity, Co-Op or Sorority House which require 24 hours notification to the Facilities Manager.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 14 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory changes.
a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in base bid
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation.
B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number.
C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product:
1. Name and address of the manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturer's data:
a. Reference standards.
b. Performance test data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with other products and construction methods.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021
2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable products.
1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL
A. Equivalents or Approvals - General
1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted.
2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product. In making such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved.
3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make
no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar and equal to any named product.
4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor.
5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021
B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding
1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of
the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner, e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than
ninety (90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract.
2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign
of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required therefore shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the work from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named.
1. Products:
a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021
b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an
unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers that complies with requirements.
- Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Proposal Submission Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will
be allowed.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form as
provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner.
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need
for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award.
C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with:
1. Completed "Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿ is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage.
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature; identify:
- Product description.
- Reference standards.
- Performance and test data.
c. Samples, as applicable.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation.
3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations.
4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-7 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021
5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project.
6. List any changes required in other work or projects.
7. Designate any required license fees or royalties.
8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials.
D. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum.
E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from the Contractor.
2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier.
3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
F. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner.
G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution.
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an
unnamed product or manufacturer:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight,
size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product specified.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-8 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that:
1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified.
4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 25 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work.
1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meetings.
5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions.
6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting.
a. To all participants in the meeting.
b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. To the Architect.
B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties.
C. Attendance:
1. Owner's Representative(s)
2. Contractor(s)
3. Architect and its professional consultants
4. Major Subcontractors
5. Major suppliers
6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
D. Minimum Agendum:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers
b. Projected Construction Schedules
2. Critical work sequencing
a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities
4. Project Coordination
a. Designation of responsible personnel
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions
b. Proposal requests
c. Submittals
d. Change Orders
e. Applications for Payment
f. Requests for Information
g. Daily Reports
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, work and storage areas
b. Owner's requirements
c. Job site personnel conduct
d. Building access and security
9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids
10. Temporary utilities
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
11. Safety and first-aid procedures
a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan
12. Security procedures
13. Housekeeping procedures
14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period.
B. Attendance:
1. Architect
2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed
3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent
4. Owner's Representatives
5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
7. Safety Representative
C. Minimum Agenda:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting
2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades
3. Review of work progress since previous meeting
4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts
5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule
6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules
7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule
8. Revisions to Construction Schedule
9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period
10. Coordination of schedules
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required
12. Maintenance of quality standards
13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders
14. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project
15. Other business
D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor.
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)
A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well
as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting.
B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 19***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
OLIN HALL B01, 101 ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-1 LAB RENOVATIONS MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project.
1. The Owner shall manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of its use on the Project.
B. There are no fees to utilize this system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation.
B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository. All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Users will be provided a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system.
B. Training
1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal.
C. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum, the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
OLIN HALL B01, 101 ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-2 LAB RENOVATIONS MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 2, 2021
1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/downloading capability
2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production
3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly
4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera
5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software
D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and pre-construction surveys.
1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW
A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within the ePM system.
B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are engaged on this project.
C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and the like, will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically.
D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner.
E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor recommends.
F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited.
G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00.
H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
OLIN HALL B01, 101 ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-3 LAB RENOVATIONS MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 2, 2021
I. Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports.
J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system, field by date and type including but not limited to:
1. General Progress Photographs
2. RFI Issues
3. Non-Conforming Work
4. Special Events
5. As required by individual Specification Sections
K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in both native and PDF formats.
L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits and agency approvals that relate to the project.
M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team.
N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system.
O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders.
P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system.
Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
OLIN HALL B01, 101 ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-4 LAB RENOVATIONS MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 2, 2021
1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above as required to suit the project.
B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and distribute all information contained therein.
C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 50***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work.
B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed.
C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner.
D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values.
E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules.
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart.
1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation.
2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week.
3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions.
B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers.
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list:
a. Area of Work demolition
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
b. Subcontractor work
c. Equipment installations
d. Finishes
e. Pre-Installation meetings
3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month.
4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified.
B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show:
1. The dates for Contractor's submittals.
2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect.
3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule.
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
1. Major changes in scope
2. Activities modified since previous submission
3. Revised projections of progress and completion
4. Other identifiable changes
C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract.
1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt.
2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment.
C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work.
D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction.
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Owner Job Site personnel
2. Subcontractors
3. Other concerned parties
B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 16***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Samples
4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals
5. Coordination Drawings
6. Certification of Asbestos free products
7. Owner audio/visual
8. Owner furnishings and fixed equipment
B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be
needed.
C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved
with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any non-electronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative.
1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE
A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications, listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents.
C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information:
1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review)
2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor
review)
3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review)
4. Category of Submittal (Certification, Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for Contractor review)
5. Submittal Description including description of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review)
6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional)
7. Date due from Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required)
9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required)
10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required)
12. Priority. Low, normal or high (Contractor provided, required)
D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below.
E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in the baseline schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals are received.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner.
1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents.
2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings.
3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements.
6. Submittal:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned
electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01 35 29.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply.
6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work.
7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required.
8. Submittals:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”.
1.5 SAMPLES
A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices.
2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.
C. Field samples and mock-ups:
1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect.
2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section.
3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.
4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect.
5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed.
1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated.
2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer.
3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture.
4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations.
5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices.
6. Submittals:
a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports.
B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents.
D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product.
E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
F. Submittals:
1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken.
2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”.
1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate and manage the preparation and submittal of coordinated layouts of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide electronic record of each coordination drawing submitted in TIFF and PDF formats to the Owner. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available.
B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required thirty (30) days prior to commencement of fabrication and/or installation of any work item.
C. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 3/8 inch =1 foot (1:32) showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide copies of each coordination drawing submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all spaces, including but not limited to, corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and other areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available.
1. Show architectural, structural and other adjacent work requiring coordination with services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling construction, structural decks and framing, fixtures, devices, and other adjacent work coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings.
2. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
3. Include room names and numbers of each space.
4. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple entities in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
5. Contract drawings are diagrammatic. Exact location of receptacles, light fixtures, exit signs, fire alarm devices, and other devices shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings and shall not be scaled from locations indicated on the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. Coordinate modifications in layout as necessary to complete the
Work in accordance with the design intent.
6. Coordinate modifications in layout and components necessary to ensure maintenance accessibility and prevent conflict between each portion of the Work.
7. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. Unless indicated otherwise, all mechanical and electrical systems and associated components are to be installed as tight to underside of structure as possible.
8. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical systems, communications systems, security systems, and other portions of the Work. Drawings shall indicate dimensions, to avoid interference with existing conditions, structural frame, ceilings, partitions, services, and other portions of the Work. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various portions of the Work, Contractor shall be responsible to resolve conflicts and coordinate the available space to accommodate each portion of the Work. Adjustments resulting from coordination shall be initialed and dated by the entity(s) affected by the adjustments.
9. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.
10. Show location and size of access doors and access panels required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.
11. Indicate required installation sequences.
12. Indicate dimensions, elevations, and alignments shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions, elevations, and alignments that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements and notify Architect. Provide
alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.
13. Indicate suspended ceiling heights and show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
14. Indicate locations of fire-rated partitions, smoke partitions, and other required barriers.
15. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, toilet partitions, overhead-mounted equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components and notify Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
16. Exposed Ceiling Construction: In addition to other indicated information, show fully-dimensioned locations of all items exposed at ceiling space. Indicate alignment requirements and centerline locations of light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduit, and other services. Show dashed outline locations of laboratory casework, shelving, and other
items that extend 7 feet or more above the floor.
17. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical and electrical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-
protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. Indicate paths of egress from rooms. Indicate paths for equipment removal from rooms. Indicate clear areas required for access and maintenance.
18. Structural Penetrations: Indicate scheduled and requested penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. Request un-scheduled penetrations and openings where Contractor has reviewed, analyzed, and coordinated all possible routing options and structural penetrations are only feasible option to accommodate indicated ceiling heights. Refer to the drawings for general guidelines and request confirmation by Architect for structural penetrations.
19. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show dimensioned locations, sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, accessories, and support systems. Show locations of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
20. Electrical Work: Show electrical distribution, systems, equipment, and runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. Show light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, fire alarm, and other device locations. Show panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, bus way, generator, and motor control center locations. Show location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Show lighting control systems. Show cable tray layouts including vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions, clearances for access above and to side of cable trays, and vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
21. Fire Suppression System: Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.
22. Refer to individual Sections for additional Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.
23. Contractor Sign-Off: Contractor and each entity performing portions of the Work shall sign and date coordination drawings.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-9 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
24. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so
inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. Review of coordination drawings shall not reduce Contractor’s responsibility for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of systems and equipment with existing conditions and each portion of the Work.
D. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building.
1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect.
B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened with all costs to remediate the situation.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for:
1. Compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions.
3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction.
4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades.
5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule.
7. All other provisions of the agreements.
E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-10 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work.
G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time.
H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work.
I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled.
J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals.
K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings.
L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39.
1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination
1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner.
2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.
3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved.
4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened.
An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules.
6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-11 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal.
8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing.
9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect.
10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule.
11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense.
B. Submittal Preparation
1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents.
4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful description.
5. Include the following information on submittal documentation:
a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product.
b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps
f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations.
6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals.
7. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-12 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Submittal Transmittal:
1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed.
2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual.
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section.
B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following:
1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed.
2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly.
3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to revise and resubmit.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-13 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate, or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them.
7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect.
a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action.
b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents.
C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action.
D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action.
E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission.
1.13 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the electronic project management system to:
1. Job site file
2. Record Documents file
3. Subcontractors
4. Installers
5. Suppliers
6. Manufacturers
7. Fabricators
8. Architect
9. Owner
B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 33 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such
requirements.
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN
A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should
address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-safety
1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information, controls and requirements.
2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment.
3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment.
B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or milestone.
1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work.
D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP.
E. Definitions:
1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply.
2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
• The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code).
• The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building Code-§202.2).
3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu.
4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert.
1.3 ASBESTOS
A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos. At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions.
B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building.
C. Based on the above, disposal of asbestos containing material is not anticipated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.4 LEAD
A. Building may contain lead-based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site-specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead-based paint.
1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION
A. Building may contain mercury. Mercury is a metal that is liquid at room temperature and is toxic to humans and the environment. Mercury can accumulate under laboratory benches and especially in the pipes in old laboratories. Dismantling old fixtures with care can prevent unnecessary spills. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. Mercury is regulated by OSHA and the EPA. If encountered, mercury shall be collected safely utilizing proper measures to prevent exposure and must be turned over to
Cornell Environmental Health & Safety for disposal. In the event of a spill, leave and secure the area, call Cornell Dispatch 255-1111 and request the campus Spill Response Team.
1.6 SITE VISITS
A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person.
1.7 CONFINED SPACE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Survey
Snee Hall – Cornell University
Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations
Prepared For
Chaing O’Brien Architects
Crescent Building
217 North Aurora Street
Ithaca, New York 14850
April 2021
Snee & Olin Halls – Cornell University
Ithaca, New York
Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations
Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Survey
April 2021
Prepared For
Chiang O’Brien Architects
Crescent Building
217 North Aurora Street
Ithaca, New York 14850
Prepared By
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
11 Centre Park, Suite 203
Rochester, New York 14614
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ i ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
Table of Contents
Section Page
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 2
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK .............................................................................................................................. 3
3.0 ANALYTICAL METHODS .................................................................................................................... 4
4.0 HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM ............................................................................. 5
5.0 BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM ................................................................................................. 6
6.0 DISCUSSION ...................................................................................................................................... 7
Tables
Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form ..................................................................................... 5
Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form ........................................................................................................... 6
Appendices
Appendix A Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data
Appendix B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and Chain‐of‐Custody Records
Appendix C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos License and Certificates
Appendix D Laboratory Certificates
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 1 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. (B&L), was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct a limited pre‐
renovation asbestos survey for the Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab renovation project at Snee and Olin
Halls on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The purpose of the survey was to
identify and quantify suspect asbestos‐containing materials (ACMs) prior to the Researchers Planning &
Enabling Work project. Sampling was conducted based upon previous survey information and drawings
provided by the architect which highlight areas to be renovated. The inspection was conducted on March
19, 2021. This report represents the conditions of the property at the time of the survey.
Materials suspected of potentially containing asbestos were sampled by B&L’s New York State Certified
Asbestos Inspectors. These materials included ceiling panels, lab bench, glued on ceiling tile, ceiling tile
glue, and canvas covered corkboard.
The following material was presumed to be ACM base on previous sampling data:
Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations
Material Code Description Quantity Location
FLVCT‐AAA 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled
Floor Tile
2,451 SF Snee Hall
SINK‐AAA Counter Top Black Mastic 39 SF Snee Hall
HOOD‐AAA Transite Fume Hood
(not impacted by this project)
60 SF Snee Hall
GLAZE‐AAA Grey Window Glaze
(not impacted by this project)
10 SF Snee Hall
The other materials sampled were found to contain no asbestos or less than one percent (<1%) and are,
therefore, categorized as non‐ACM.
Refer to Table 1 – “Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary” for a listing of the location, condition, and
quantity of ACM in the building.
Since the building is slated for renovation, all materials identified as ACM and PACM that will be impacted
during the course of the project should be abated by a licensed NYS asbestos abatement contractor prior to
commencement of renovation activities. The New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) also requires
that a copy of this report to be kept on site during all phases of construction.
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 2 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
INTRODUCTION
B&L was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct an asbestos inspection of Snell and Olin Halls
located on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The inspection was designed to
determine the presence and quantity of ACM/PACM prior to Researchers Planning & Enabling Work project
renovations.
B&L’s inspection team consisted of New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) accredited inspectors
Michael Goff (Certificate No. 01‐07588) and Joseph Cavallaro (Certificate No. 19‐00091). B&L’s license and
each inspector’s asbestos certificate are presented in Appendix C. The inspection was performed on March
19, 2021.
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 3 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
SCOPE OF WORK
The above referenced buildings were surveyed for the presence of thermal system insulation, surfacing
materials, and miscellaneous materials suspected of containing asbestos. Both friable and non‐friable
materials were sampled. Prior asbestos survey investigation data conducted by Delta in both Snee and Olin
Halls was provided. Data for Snee Hall appears limited, while sampling data from Olin Hall is quite extensive.
The inspection was performed in accordance with the requirements of Part 56 of the Official Compilation of
Codes, Rules and Regulations of the State of New York (12 NYCRR Part 56, as amended and adopted March
21, 2007), Section 56‐5.1, Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation,
Remodeling, and Repair. Inspection procedures followed the requirements of the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) found at 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E ‐ Asbestos Containing Materials in Schools; Final Rule and
Notice, Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA).
When suspect ACM was encountered, the material was assessed, quantified, and either assumed to be
ACM or sampled. The condition of the ACM and PACM materials is reported in Table 1. The sample location
was noted in the field sketches. Sample locations are summarized in Table 2, Bulk Sampling Summary Form.
Each sample was sent to a laboratory accredited by the New York State Department of Health (NYSDOH)
Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP) and the National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for analysis.
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 4 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
ANALYTICAL METHODS
Bulk samples collected at the building were analyzed by AmeriSci New York (AmeriSci), 117 East 30th Street,
New York, New York. AmeriSci is accredited by NIST under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP) for Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) analysis of bulk samples (Accreditation Number
200546‐0). AmeriSci is also accredited by the New York State Department of Health under the
Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP, Accreditation No. 11480).
Samples were analyzed by polarized light microscopy (PLM) in accordance with the NYSDOH Polarized
Light Microscopy Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.1).
Samples were analyzed sequentially until positive for asbestos or until each sample in the set was
analyzed. A material was classified as non‐asbestos containing only if each sample in the set was
determined to be less than one percent by weight (<1%).
Non‐friable organically bound (NOB) materials, such as floor tiles, mastic and roofing materials, and
ceiling tiles/panels containing cellulose that were found to be <1% by PLM, were also analyzed using the
NYSDOH Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in
Non‐Friable Organically Bound Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.4). If TEM confirmed that the asbestos
content was <1%, the material was considered non‐asbestos containing.
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 5 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM
The quantities of the homogeneous ACM/PACM identified within the building are summarized on
Table 1. The information is listed by homogeneous material code and presents the location, class,
description, condition, and quantity of the ACM/PACM as it occurs. The total quantity of each
ACM/PACM found in the building has been calculated and is presented at the end of the list. The
information presented on the form is derived from the sample results and proposed work area floor
plans.
Table 1
Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form
Cornell University
Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations ‐ Snee Hall / Olin Hall
Ithaca, NY
March 19, 2021
Snee Hall
Material
Code
Material
Location
Material
Class
Material
Description
Sample
ID
Condition Quantity ACM?
FLVCT‐
AAA
1149 M 12”x12” Black
w/ Grey
Mottled Floor
Tile
Not Sampled
Good
559 PACM
1156 M Good 1238 PACM
3158 M Good 654 PACM
TOTAL 2,451 SF
SINK‐
AAA
1149 M Counter Top
Black Mastic
Not Sampled Good 3 PACM
1156 M Good 15 PACM
2157 M Good 3 PACM
3158 M Good 18 PACM
TOTAL 39 SF
HOOD‐
AAA
3158 M Transite Fume
Hood
Not Sampled Fair 60 PACM
TOTAL 60 SF
M = Miscellaneous S = Surfacing T = Thermal
*Additional (GLAZE‐AAA) grey window glaze locations and quantities will be listed if the project scope
changes to include removal of classroom/laboratory doors.
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 6 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM
This table presents a summary of the bulk sampling performed at the building. It lists the material code,
material description, sample location, sample ID, and the analytical results. Results for PLM and TEM
analyses are presented as appropriate.
Table 2
Bulk Sampling Summary Form
Cornell University
Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations ‐ Snee Hall / Olin Hall
Ithaca, NY
March 19, 2021
Material
Code
Material
Description
Sample
Location
Sample
ID
Analytical Results
PLM TEM
Snee Hall
FLVCT‐
AAA
12”x12” Black w/ Grey
Mottled Floor Tile –B&L
1/2020 report
Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM
SINK‐AAA Counter Top Black Mastic –
Delta 8/27/13 report
Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM
HOOD‐
AAA
Fume Hood – Delta 8/5/19
report
Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM
GLAZE‐
AAA
Grey Window Glaze – B&L
1/2020 report
Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM
CLTL‐1 1’x1’ Fissured Glued‐On
Ceiling Tile
1156
1156
CLTL‐1‐1
CLTL‐1‐2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
CLGL‐2 Brown Ceiling Tile Glue 1156
1156
CLGL‐2‐1
CLGL‐2‐2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
CANVAS‐3 Canvas Corkboard Cover 1149
1149
CANVAS‐3‐1
CANVAS‐3‐2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
CLGL‐4 Tan Ceiling Tile Glue 1156
1156
CLGL‐4‐1
CLGL‐4‐2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
Olin Hall
CLLI‐1 2’x4’ Smooth White Vinyl
Covered Ceiling Panel w/ Grey
Speckle
201
201
CLLI‐1‐1
CLLI‐1‐2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
BENCH‐2 Black Lab Bench 101
101
101
BENCH‐2‐1
BENCH‐2‐2
BENCH‐2‐3
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
CLLI‐3 2’x4’ Long Deep Fissure
Ceiling Panel
101
101
CLLI‐3‐1
CLLI‐3‐2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
CLLI‐4 2’x4’ Long Fissure Ceiling
Panel
101
101
CLLI‐4‐1
CLLI‐4‐2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 7 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
DISCUSSION
Of the suspect materials sampled by B&L from Snee Hall, none are considered asbestos containing as
per laboratory analysis. 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile (FLVCT‐AAA) was determined to be
asbestos containing in B&L’s previous sampling. Black floor tile mastic associated with this tile was
determined non‐asbestos by Delta‘s sampling. Black Trespa countertops are non‐asbestos as per Delta’s
survey, but (SINK‐AAA) associated countertop black mastic is asbestos containing. The fume hood in
Room 3158 is presumed asbestos based on Delta’s sampling report. Grey window glazing on interior
door glass was sampled by B&L in January of 2020 and is asbestos containing but should not be
impacted by based on the scope of this project.
Delta’s asbestos survey details extensive sampling in Olin Hall. Some suspect asbestos materials in the
proposed renovation area were determined non‐asbestos through Delta’s sampling and subsequent
laboratory analysis. Four additional suspect material, not covered by Delta’s report, were sampled by
B&L and are non‐asbestos as per laboratory analysis. The fume hood in Room 101 may be asbestos
containing transite, but is not scheduled to be impacted by renovations.
Appendix A
Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data
CANVAS-3-1,2CLTL-1-1,2CLGL-2-1,2CLGL-4-1,2CLLI-1-1,2BENCH-2-1,2,3CLLI-3-1,2CLLI-4-1,2
Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
Snee Hall – Cornell University
EAS Consolidation Design
Prepared for
Chaing O’Brien Architects
Crescent Building
217 North Aurora Street
Ithaca, New York 14850
January 2020
Snee Hall – Cornell University
Ithaca, New York
Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
January 2020
Prepared for
Chiang O’Brien Architects
Crescent Building
217 North Aurora Street
Ithaca, New York 14850
Prepared by
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
11 Centre Park, Suite 203
Rochester, New York 14614
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - i - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 2
2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 ANALYTICAL METHODS .................................................................................................................... 4
4.0 HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM ............................................................................. 5
5.0 BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM ................................................................................................. 7
6.0 DISCUSSION...................................................................................................................................... 9
Tables
Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form ............................................................................ 5
Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form .................................................................................................. 7
Appendices
Appendix A Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data
Appendix B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and Chain-of-Custody Records
Appendix C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos License and Certificates
Appendix D Laboratory Certificates
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 1 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. (B&L) was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct a limited pre-
renovation asbestos survey at Snee Hall on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The
purpose of the survey was to identify and quantify suspect asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) prior to
the EAS Consolidation renovation project. Sampling was conducted based upon previous survey
information and drawings provided by the architect which highlight areas to be renovated. A portion of the
second floor of Olin Hall was included as part of the survey since the area will be used as transition space
during the project. The inspection was conducted on January 8, 2020. This report represents the conditions
of the property at the time of the survey.
Materials suspected of potentially containing asbestos were sampled by B&L’s New York State Certified
Asbestos Inspector. These materials included cove base, cove base mastic, caulk materials, window glaze,
ceiling panel, floor leveler, ceiling panels, sink undercoating, pipe sealant, floor tile, mastic material, and
firestop.
The following materials were determined to be ACM:
Material Code Description Quantity Location
GLAZE-7 Grey Window Glaze TBD Snee Hall
FLVCT-14 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile 13,284 SF Snee Hall
The following material was presumed to be ACM:
Material Code Description Quantity Location
SINK-AAA Counter Top Black Mastic 17 SF Snee Hall
The other materials sampled were found to contain no asbestos or less than one percent (<1%) and are,
therefore, categorized as non-ACM.
Refer to Table 1 – “Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary” for a listing of the location, condition, and
quantity of ACM in the building.
Since the building is slated for renovation, all materials identified as ACM and PACM that will be impacted
during the course of the project should be abated by a licensed NYS asbestos abatement contractor prior to
commencement of renovation activities. The New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) also requires
that this report be forwarded to the Commissioner of Labor through the Division of Safety and Health,
Asbestos Control Bureau and to the local government agency charged with issuing demolition permits (see
12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1). The local NYSDOL office is located at:
New York State Department of Labor
Division of Safety and Health
Asbestos Control Bureau
450 S. Salina Street
Syracuse, NY 13202
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 2 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
1.0 INTRODUCTION
B&L was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct an asbestos inspection of Snell Hall and Olin Hall
located on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The inspection was designed to
determine the presence and quantity of ACM/PACM prior to EAS Consolidation Project renovations. The
work areas consist of approximately 11,000 SF of Snee Hall and approximately 750 SF of Olin Hall.
B&L’s inspection team consisted of New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) accredited inspectors
Michael Goff (Certificate No. 01-07588) and Joseph Cavallaro (Certificate No. 19-00091). B&L’s license and
the inspector’s asbestos certificate are presented in Appendix C. The inspection was performed on January
8, 2020.
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 3 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
The above referenced buildings were surveyed for the presence of thermal system insulation, surfacing
materials, and miscellaneous materials suspected of containing asbestos. Both friable and non-friable
materials were sampled. Prior asbestos survey investigation data conducted by Delta in both Snee and Olin
Halls was provided. Data for Snee Hall appears limited, while sampling data from Olin Hall is quite extensive.
The inspection was performed in accordance with the requirements of Part 56 of the Official Compilation of
Codes, Rules and Regulations of the State of New York (12 NYCRR Part 56, as amended and adopted March
21, 2007), Section 56-5.1, Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation,
Remodeling, and Repair. Inspection procedures followed the requirements of the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) found at 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E - Asbestos Containing Materials in Schools; Final Rule and
Notice, Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA).
When suspect ACM was encountered, the material was assessed, quantified, and either assumed to be
ACM or sampled. The condition of the ACM and PACM materials is reported in Table 1. The sample location
was noted in the field sketches. Sample locations are summarized in Table 2, Bulk Sampling Summary Form.
Each sample was sent to a laboratory accredited by the New York State Department of Health (NYSDOH)
Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP) and the National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for analysis.
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 4 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
3.0 ANALYTICAL METHODS
Bulk samples collected at the building were analyzed by AmeriSci New York (AmeriSci), 117 East 30th Street,
New York, New York. AmeriSci is accredited by NIST under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP) for Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) analysis of bulk samples (Accreditation Number
200546-0). AmeriSci is also accredited by the New York State Department of Health under the
Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP, Accreditation No. 11480).
Samples were analyzed by polarized light microscopy (PLM) in accordance with the NYSDOH Polarized
Light Microscopy Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.1).
Samples were analyzed sequentially until positive for asbestos or until each sample in the set was
analyzed. A material was classified as non-asbestos containing only if each sample in the set was
determined to be less than one percent by weight (<1%).
Non-friable organically bound (NOB) materials, such as floor tiles, mastic and roofing materials, and
ceiling tiles/panels containing cellulose that were found to be <1% by PLM, were also analyzed using the
NYSDOH Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in
Non-Friable Organically Bound Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.4). If TEM confirmed that the asbestos
content was <1%, the material was considered non-asbestos containing.
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 5 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
4.0 HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM
The quantities of the homogeneous ACM/PACM identified within the building are summarized on
Table 1. The information is listed by homogeneous material code and presents the location, class,
description, condition, and quantity of the ACM/PACM as it occurs. The total quantity of each
ACM/PACM found in the building has been calculated and is presented at the end of the list. The
information presented on the form is derived from the sample results and proposed work area floor
plans.
Table 1
Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form
Cornell University
Snee Hall / Olin Hall
Ithaca NY
January 8, 2020
Snee Hall
Material
Code
Material
Location
Material
Class Material Description Sample ID Condition Quantity ACM?
GLAZE-7 2159 M Grey Window Glaze GLAZE-7-1,2 Good 1 Y
TOTAL TBD
FLVCT-14 2002 M 12”x12” Black w/ Grey
Mottled Floor Tile
Good 118 Y
2021 M Good 1997 Y
2022 M FLVCT-14-1,2 Good 814 Y
2034 M Good 24 Y
2149 M Good 538 Y
2152 M Good 754 Y
2160C M Good 227 Y
2161 M Good 309 Y
2161B M Good 143 Y
3021 M Good 1737 Y
3022 M Good 873 Y
3147 M Good 447 Y
3161 M Good 1132 Y
4021 M Good 1771 Y
4022 M Good 874 Y
4154 M Good 1272 Y
4154D M Good 254 Y
TOTAL 13,284 SF
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 6 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
Table 1
Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form
Cornell University
Snee Hall / Olin Hall
Ithaca NY
January 8, 2020
Snee Hall
Material
Code
Material
Location
Material
Class Material Description Sample ID Condition Quantity ACM?
SINK-
AAA
2149 M Counter Top Black
Mastic
Not Sampled Fair 3 PACM
2152 M Fair 3 PACM
3161 M Fair 3 PACM
4154 M Fair 8 PACM
TOTAL 17 SF
M = Miscellaneous S = Surfacing T = Thermal
*Additional (GLAZE-7) grey window glaze locations and quantities will be listed pending further field investigation.
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 7 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
5.0 BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM
This table presents a summary of the bulk sampling performed at the building. It lists the material code,
material description, sample location, sample ID, and the analytical results. Results for PLM and TEM
analyses are presented as appropriate.
Table 2
Bulk Sampling Summary Form
Cornell University
Snee Hall / Olin Hall
Ithaca, NY
January 8, 2020
Material
Code Material Description
Sample
Location
Sample
ID
Analytical Results
PLM TEM
Snee Hall
SINK-AAA Counter Top Black Mastic – Delta
8/27/13 report
Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM
BBD-1 Brown Cove Base 1134
1134
BBD-1-1
BBD-1-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
BBDMAS-2 Tan Cove Base Mastic 1134
1134
BBDMAS-2-1
BBDMAS-2-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
GLUE-3 Green/Tan Carpet Glue 1134
1134
GLUE-3-1
GLUE-3-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
CAULK-4 White Caulk 1134
1134
CAULK-4-1
CAULK-4-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
BBD-5 Grey Cove Base 1134
1134
BBD-5-1
BBD-5-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
CAULK-6 Black Window Caulk 1134
1134
CAULK-6-1
CAULK-6-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
GLAZE-7 Grey Window Glaze 2159
2159
GLAZE-7-1
GLAZE-7-2
1.6% CH
NA
NA
NA
CLLI-8 2’x2’ Smooth Fiberglass Ceiling
Panel
2160
2160
CLLI-8-1
CLLI-8-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
BBD-9 Black Cove Base 2159
2159
BBD-9-1
BBD-9-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
LEVELER-10 Black/Grey Floor Leveler 2159
2159
2159
LEVELER-10-1
LEVELER-10-2
LEVELER-10-3
NAD
NAD
NAD
-
-
-
FLVCT-11 12”x12” Black w/ White Fleck
Floor Tile
2162
2162
FLVCT-11-1
FLVCT-11-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
SINK-12 Grey Sink Undercoating 2162
2162
SINK-12-1
SINK-12-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
SEALANT-13 White Pipe Sealant 2162
2162
SEALANT-13-1
SEALANT-13-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
FLVCT-14 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled
Floor Tile
2022
2022
FLVCT-14-1
FLVCT-14-2
<0.25% CH
<0.25% CH
6.0% CH
NAD
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 8 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
Table 2
Bulk Sampling Summary Form
Cornell University
Snee Hall / Olin Hall
Ithaca, NY
January 8, 2020
Material
Code Material Description
Sample
Location
Sample
ID
Analytical Results
PLM TEM
CAULK-15 Grey Door Caulk 2022
2022
CAULK-15-1
CAULK-15-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
MAS-16 Black Mastic – Raised Flooring
Stanchions
2161A
2161A
MAS-16-1
MAS-16-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
FLVCT-17 Light Grey 2’x2’ Floor Panel 2161A
2161A
FLVCT-17-1
FLVCT-17-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
FRSTP-18 Red Firestop Material 3149
3149
FRSTP-18-1
FRSTP-18-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
CLLI-19 2’x2’ Smooth w/ Recessed Edge
Ceiling Panel
4154A
4154A
CLLI-19-1
CLLI-19-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
Olin Hall
CLLI-20 2’x2’ Smooth w/ Recessed Edge
Ceiling Panel
230
230
CLLI-20-1
CLLI-20-2
NAD
NAD
NAD
NAD
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 9 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
6.0 DISCUSSION
Of the suspect materials sampled by B&L from Snee Hall, (GLAZE-7) grey window glazing and (FLVCT-14)
12”x12” black w/ grey mottled floor tile are asbestos containing as per laboratory analysis. Black floor
tile mastic associated with (FLVCT-14) was determined non-asbestos by Delta‘s sampling. Black Trespa
countertops are non-asbestos as per Delta’s survey, but (SINK-AAA) associated countertop black mastic
is asbestos containing.
Delta’s asbestos survey details extensive sampling in Olin Hall. Suspect asbestos materials in the
proposed renovation area were determined non-asbestos through Delta’s sampling and subsequent
laboratory analysis. One additional suspect material, not covered by Delta’s report, was sampled by B&L
and is non-asbestos as per laboratory analysis.
APPENDIX A
Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data
BBD-1-1,2
BBDMAS-2-1,2
GLUE-3-1,2
BBD-5-1,2
CAULK-4-2
CAULK-4-1
CAULK-6-1,2
BBD-9-1,2
CLLI-8-1,2
FLVCT-11-1,2
LEVELER-10-1,2,3
SINK-12-1,2
SEALANT-13-1,2
CAULK-15-1,2
+ FLVCT-14-1,2
MAS-16-1,2
FLVCT-17-1,2
+ GLAZE-7-1,2
FRSTP-18-1,2
CLLI-19-1,2
CLLI-20-1,2
Cornell University
Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report
Performed at
Snee Hall (Building 2049)
For the
Snee Hall Rooms 4158/4160A/4160B
Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project
Cornell University Ithaca, New York Campus
Prepared for:
Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Facilities Coordinator Projects II
Cornell University IPP – Facilities Management
FM Administration
116 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, NY 14853
Prepared by:
860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760
Phone: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640
www.delta-eas.com
Delta Project No. 2019.003.108
Cornell Work Order No. 11898216 / Task Authorization No. 108
Field work performed by: Michael Drobak, July 31, 2019
Report prepared by: Michael Drobak, August 5, 2019
Report reviewed by: Stephen Prislupsky
2
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 3
2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS ................. 5
3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS ........................................................ 12
4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS................................................................................. 13
Appendix A, ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE REPORT FORM .......................................... 14
Appendix B, LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS ................................................. 15
Appendix C, DELTA ENGINEERS, COMPANY AND PERSONNEL CERTIFICATIONS ....... 16
Appendix D, LABORATORY CERTIFICATIONS ......................................................... 17
Appendix E, SURVEY LOCATION / LIMITS & SAMPLE LOCATION DRAWINGS.............. 18
Appendix F, PHOTO LOG .................................................................................... 19
3
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
1.0 INTRODUCTION:
Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors (Delta) was contracted by Cornell University to
provide a Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey in Rooms 4158, 4158A, 4160, 4160A &
4160B at Snee Hall (Bldg. 2049) in support of the upcoming Mass Spectrometer Exhaust
Replacement Project. The survey addressed all accessible Spaces included in the project
renovation areas referenced above and associated suspect building materials with the potential
to be impacted by the upcoming Project. The areas addressed as a part of this Survey were
based on the drawings and information provided onsite at the time of the Survey by Cornell
Project Representative Michael Swartwout (reference Attachment E for the Renovation Area
Location / Limits Drawing).
The initial stage included a review of past Delta sample information, sample information from
other Consultants, and Cornell 4D Database information for the Building. Cornell 4D Database
information and bulk sample results through previous Delta/Cornell Consultant sampling efforts
have been incorporated into this Survey and associated Survey Report where applicable.
On July 31st, 2019, Delta Certified Inspector Michael Drobak conducted a walkthrough of the
renovation area spaces/rooms to identify the various accessible suspect materials present.
Based on a visual inspection of the affected areas along with a review of the project scope and
existing sample information, a total of eight (8) bulk samples were collected representing four
(4) separate suspect homogenous building materials. All eight (8) of the samples collected were
non-friable organically bound (NOB) representing four (4) homogenous materials.
In addition to the samples collected above, other suspect homogenous materials with the
potential to be impacted by the project were observed but not sampled as they were either
addressed through previous sampling efforts or they were not sampled as they would not be
impacted by the scope of work. For the previously sampled materials, the results from the
Cornell 4D Database information and previous Delta/Cornell Consultant Surveys have been
incorporated into this report. For those materials that were not sampled based on the scope of
work, they are “assumed” asbestos containing for the purposes of this Survey. The suspect
homogenous building materials identified and/or sampled in the affected mass spectrometer
installation project renovation areas included the following:
Homogenous
Area (HA) Suspect Building Material
01 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant
02 Yellow Mastic from 4” Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base
03 Black Mastic from 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile
04 Black Trespa Countertop
05* Fume Hood Transite Panels
06** Brown Drywall
07** Joint Compound from Brown Drywall
08** White Drywall
09** Joint Compound from White Drywall
10** White Caulk
11** 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile
4
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
* – Material confirmed to be Asbestos Containing Transite based on Visual Inspection
** – Material previously sampled by Cornell Consultant or included in Cornell 4D Database
Specific information required by 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1, (f) – “Building/Structure Asbestos
Survey Information” to be included in this pre-renovation report is as follows:
1) Building Name/Address: Snee Hall, Building 2049
112 Hollister Drive
Cornell University Campus
Ithaca, NY 14850
2) Owner’s Name/Address: Cornell University
Humphreys Service Building
Ithaca, NY 14853
3) Owner’s Agent: Mr. Dale Houseknecht
4) Survey Performed By: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
5) Certified Inspectors: Michael Drobak
Certificate No. 02-18996
6) Date of Survey: July 31st, 2019
7) Laboratory: America Science Team New York, Inc.
117 East 30th Street, New York, NY 10016
5
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS:
2.1 Survey requirements
Requirements to perform Pre-Demolition/Pre-Renovation Asbestos Surveys are based on the
following State and Federal Regulations.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA survey requirements and
sampling protocols are included in 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j) (2) & (j) (8) and 29 CFR Part
1926.1101(k), (5):
29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2), Installed Asbestos Containing Material: Employers and building owners are required
to treat installed TSI and sprayed on and troweled-on surfacing materials as ACM in buildings constructed no later
than 1980 for purposes of this standard. These materials are designated "presumed ACM or PACM", and are
defined in paragraph (b) of this section. Asphalt and vinyl flooring material installed no later than 1980 also must be
treated as asbestos-containing. The employer or building owner may demonstrate that PACM and flooring material
do not contain asbestos by complying with paragraph (j) (8) (iii) of this section.
29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j) (8), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM:
1910.1001(j)(8)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard,
that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate
information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of
paragraph (j)(8)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis
supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (m) of
this section.
1910.1001(j) (8) (ii) - An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain asbestos by the following:
1910.1001(j)(8)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40
CFR 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that no ACM is present in the material; or
1910.1001(j) (8) (ii) (B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is
present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in
40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or
by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by
current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or
the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an
equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program.
1910.1001(j)(8)(iii) -The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including
associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon
recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM.
29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k) (5), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM:
1926.1101(k)(5)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard,
that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate
information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of
paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis
supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (n) of
this section.
1926.1101(k) (5) (ii) – An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain more than 1 percent
asbestos by the following:
1926.1101(k)(5)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40
6
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
CFR Part 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that the material is not ACM; or
1926.1101(k) (5) (ii) (B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM
is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described
in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector
or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated
by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or
the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an
equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program.
1926.1101(k)(5)(iii) - The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including
associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon
recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM.
EPA National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPs): (NESHAPs)
regulates asbestos under “40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M - National Emission Standard for
Asbestos”. Subpart M regulates demolition and/or renovation of “facilities” that may contain
asbestos-containing materials (ACMs). “Facilities,” as defined by NESHAPs, includes any
institutional, commercial, public, industrial, or residential structure or building, except residential
buildings having four or fewer units. ACMs are defined in NESHAPs as materials containing
more than 1 percent asbestos. Section 61.145 states:
61.145 Standard for demolition and renovation.
(a) Applicability. To determine which requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section apply to the
owner or operator of a demolition or renovation activity and prior to the commencement of the demolition or
renovation, thoroughly inspect the affected facility or part of the facility where the demolition or renovation
operation will occur for the presence of asbestos, including Category I and Category II nonfriable ACM.
It should be noted that 40 CFR Part 1 Subpart M, NESHAPS has no cut-off date exempting
survey requirements.
New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL): Guidelines followed for the inspection are
those established by the NYS DOL’s Industrial Code Rule 56 (Cited as 12 NYCRR Part 56, as
amended, adopted January 11, 2006; effective September 5, 2006). The specific survey,
sampling and reporting requirements included in 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1(e) – “Building/Structure
Asbestos Survey Requirements” include:
56-5.1 Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition,
Renovation, Remodeling and Repair
(a) Asbestos Survey Required. An owner or an owner’s agent, except the owner of one and
two-family dwellings who contracts for, but does not direct or control the work, shall cause to be
conducted, an asbestos survey completed by a licensed asbestos contractor using inspectors
certified in compliance with Section 56-3.2(d), to determine whether or not the building or
structure, or portion(s) thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work,
contains ACM, PACM or asbestos material. This asbestos survey shall be completed and
submitted as indicated in Subdivision (g) of this Section, prior to commencing work. All such
asbestos surveys shall be conducted in conformance with the requirements of Subdivision (e)
of this Section.
7
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
(b) Exemptions to Asbestos Survey Requirements: The asbestos survey required by this
Subdivision (a) of this Section shall not be required for the following classes of buildings or
structures:
(1) An agricultural building;
(2) Buildings or structures for which original construction commenced on or after January
1, 1974;
(3) A structure certified in writing to be structurally unsound by a licensed Professional
Engineer, Registered Architect, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector or other official of
competent jurisdiction. (See Section 56-11.5)
(c) Building/Structure Demolition. If a building/structure asbestos survey is not required or
performed per Subdivision (b) of this Section, and the building/structure is certified to be unsound
or slated for contracted demolition, the building/structure shall be assumed to contain asbestos,
and shall be demolished per this Part, unless the building/structure is adequately certified to be
free of asbestos containing material. Acceptable documentation for certification shall be a
previous thorough building/structure asbestos survey, abatement records or other
documentation acceptable to the Commissioner or his or her representative.
(d) Responsibility to Comply. No exemption to the requirement to conduct an asbestos survey
shall exempt any person, asbestos contractor, property owner or business entity from the
inspection or asbestos survey requirements of EPA, OSHA, and any other applicable section of
this Part.
(e) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements. The asbestos survey shall include a
thorough inspection for and identification of all PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos
material throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated,
remodeled, or to have repair work. The required inspection shall be performed by a certified
asbestos inspector, and, at a minimum, shall include identification of PACM, suspect
miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material by all of the following methods:
(1) The review of building/structure plans and records, if available, for references to
asbestos, ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material used in
construction, renovation or repair; and
(2) A visual inspection for PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM throughout the
building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or repaired.
For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed
shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk
sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods,
including multi-layered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are
performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and
the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered
sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing material.
(f) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information.
(1) The asbestos survey shall, at a minimum, identify and assess with due diligence, the
locations, quantities, friability and conditions of all types of installations at the affected portion of
the building/structure relative to the ACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, PACM or asbestos
8
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
material contained therein. The following list is not inclusive of all types of ACMs, it only
summarizes typical ACMs. The certified asbestos inspector is responsible for identification and
assessment of all types ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM and asbestos material within
the affected portion of the building/structure:
PACM
(i) Surfacing Treatments:
(a) Fireproofing;
(b) Acoustical Plaster;
(c) Finish Plasters; and
(d) Skim Coats of Joint Compound.
(ii) Thermal System Insulation:
(a) Equipment Insulation;
(b) Boiler, Breeching, Boiler Rope, Duct, or Tank Insulation, Cement or Mortar
Used for Boilers and Refractory Brick;
(c) Piping and Fitting Insulations including but not limited to, Wrapped Paper,
Aircell, Millboard, Rope, Cork, Preformed Plaster, Job Molded Plaster and
coverings over fibrous glass insulation.
SUSPECT MISCELLANEOUS ACM
(i) Roofing and Siding Miscellaneous Materials:
(a) Insulation Board;
(b) Vapor Barriers;
(c) Coatings;
(d) Non-Metallic or Non-Wood Roof Decking
(e) Felts;
(f) Cementitious Board (Transite);
(g) Flashing;
(h) Shingles; and
(i) Galbestos.
(ii) Other Miscellaneous Materials:
(a) Dust and Debris;
(b) Floor Tile;
(c) Cove Base;
(d) Floor Leveler Compound;
(e) Ceiling Tile;
(f) Vermiculite Insulation
(g) Gaskets, Seals, Sealants (including for condensate control);
(h) Vibration Isolators;
(i) Laboratory Tables and Hoods;
(j) Chalkboards;
(k) Pipe Penetration Packing or Other Firestopping Materials
(l) Cementitious Board;
(m) Electrical Wire Insulation;
(n) Fire Curtains;
(o) Fire Blankets;
(p) Fire Doors;
(q) Brakes and Clutches;
9
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
(r) Mastics, Adhesives and Glues;
(s) Caulks;
(t) Sheet Flooring (Linoleum);
(u) Wallpaper;
(v) Drywall;
(w) Plasterboard
(x) Spackling/Joint Compound;
(y) Textured Paint;
(z) Grout;
(aa) Glazing Compound; and
(ab) Terrazzo.
(2) All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material reported under
Paragraph (1) of this Subdivision shall include the location of the materials, an estimate of the
quantities, types, friability and condition of the identified materials to be treated and handled as
ACM. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed
shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is
conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including
multilayered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a
laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies
both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-
asbestos containing material.
(3) The building/structure asbestos survey shall also include the building/structure name,
address, the building/structure owner’s name and address, the name and address of the owner's
agent, the name of the firm performing the asbestos survey and a copy of the firm’s current
asbestos handling license, the names of the certified inspector(s) performing the survey and a
copy of the current asbestos handling certificate for each inspector utilized, the dates of the
asbestos survey, a listing of homogeneous areas identifying which ones are ACM, all laboratory
analyses reports for bulk samples collected, and copies of the appropriate certifications for the
laboratory used for analysis of samples taken during the asbestos survey.
(g) Transmittal of Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. One (1) copy of the
results of the building/structure asbestos survey shall be immediately transmitted by the
building/structure owner as follows:
(1) One (1) copy of the completed asbestos survey shall be sent by the owner or their
agent to the local government entity charged with issuing a permit for such demolition,
renovation, remodeling or repair work under applicable State or local laws.
(2) The completed asbestos survey for controlled demolition (as per Subpart 56-11.5) or
pre-demolition asbestos projects shall also be submitted to the appropriate Asbestos
Control Bureau district office.
(3) The completed asbestos survey shall be kept on the construction site with the
asbestos notification and variance, if required, throughout the duration of the asbestos
project and any associated demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project.
10
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
(h) Removal Required. If the building/structure asbestos survey finds that the portion of the
building/structure to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work contains ACM,
PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material, which is
impacted by the work, the owner or the owner’s agent shall conduct, or cause to have conducted,
asbestos removal performed by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor in conformance with
all standards set forth in this Part. All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be
ACM, or asbestos material impacted by the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project
shall be removed as per this Part, prior to access or disturbance by other uncertified trades or
personnel. No demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work shall be commenced by any
owner or the owner’s agent prior to the completion of the asbestos abatement in accordance
with the notification requirements of this Part. For multi-phased work, the access restriction for
uncertified trades or personnel applies to each intermediate portion of the entire project. Upon
completion of the intermediate portion of the asbestos project, other trades or personnel may
access that portion of the work site.
For demolition projects that are exempt from asbestos survey requirements due to being
structurally unsound, the demolition is considered an asbestos project and shall proceed as per
Section 56-11.5.
(1) All building/structure owners and asbestos abatement contractors on a demolition,
renovation, remodeling, or repair project, which includes work covered by this Part, shall inform
all trades on the work site about PACM, ACM, asbestos material and suspect miscellaneous
ACM assumed to be ACM at the work site.
(i) Bidding. Bids may be advertised and contracts awarded for demolition, remodeling,
renovation, or repair work, but no work on the current intermediate portion of the project shall
commence on the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work by any owner or agent prior
to completion of all necessary asbestos abatement work for the current intermediate portion of
the entire project, in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part.
(j) Unidentified and Unassessed Asbestos. When any construction activity, such as
demolition, remodeling, renovation or repair work, reveals PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM
that has not been identified by the asbestos survey per this Part, or has not been identified by
other inspections as per current OSHA or EPA requirements, all activities shall cease in the area
where the PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM is found and the Asbestos Control Bureau shall
be notified by telephone by the building/structure owner or their representative, followed with a
written notice in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. Unassessed PACM
or suspect miscellaneous ACM shall be treated and handled as ACM and assumed to be ACM,
unless proven otherwise by standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi-layered
systems sampling protocols; subsequent analyses performed by a laboratory that meets the
requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both NYS ELAP and
federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos
containing material.
2.2 Sample Analysis
Bulk sample analysis was performed by American Science Team New York Inc., an independent
laboratory approved/accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American
11
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP).
Samples collected during the course of this survey fell into one of two categories. The first
category includes non-friable organically bound (NOB) materials. These materials are those
which have an organic binder in their matrix and include items such as floor tiles, sheet flooring,
mastics, glazings, caulks and roofing materials. The second category includes non-NOB
“friable” materials including parging, sheetrock, joint compound, wall insulations, and wallboard.
Analysis of all “NOB” materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM)
following the New York State Department of Health ELAP 198.6 Gravimetric Reduction
Methodology. If a given sample was reported as non-asbestos following this analysis, it was
then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4
Methodology.
Analysis of all “non-NOB” materials was performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM)
following the EPA 600/M4/82/020 and the NYS DOH ELAP 198.1 Methodologies.
2.3 Materials not sampled
There were several materials present at the site which were not considered “suspect” by the
inspector and were not sampled. These included various fiberglass, foam, vinyl, silicone,
wood/cellulose products and concrete/cinder block/brick components.
12
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS
3.1) Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project Pre-Renovation
Asbestos Survey, Non-Asbestos Materials – Based on results from previous Delta Sampling
efforts, results from previous sampling efforts of other Consultants, results from the Cornell 4D
Database, and results reported for samples collected during this Survey of accessible suspect
materials within the Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project Renovation
area, the following materials were identified as non-asbestos:
Homogenous
Area (HA) Non-Asbestos Building Material
01 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant
02 Yellow Mastic from 4” Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base
03 Black Mastic from 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile
04 Black Trespa Countertop
06** Brown Drywall
07** Joint Compound from Brown Drywall
08** White Drywall
09** Joint Compound from White Drywall
10** White Caulk
** – Material previously sampled by Cornell Consultant or included in Cornell 4D Database
3.2) Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Installation Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey,
Asbestos-Containing Materials – Based on results from previous Delta Sampling efforts,
results from previous sampling efforts of other Consultants, results from the Cornell 4D
Database, and results reported for samples collected during this Survey of accessible suspect
materials within the Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project Renovation
area, the following materials were identified as being asbestos-containing:
Homogenous
Area (HA) Asbestos Containing Material
05* Fume Hood Transite Panels
11** 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile
* – Material confirmed to be Asbestos Containing Transite based on Visual Inspection
** – Material previously sampled by Cornell Consultant or included in Cornell 4D Database
A breakdown of asbestos-containing materials by Homogeneous Area is as follows:
A) Fume Hood Transite Panels, HA 05*: The panels present in the Rooms 4158 and 4160 fume
hoods were visually confirmed to be asbestos-containing transite. The total quantity of this
material is approximately 40 square feet in each fume hood (two fume hoods total), with the
amount of this material to be impacted by the Project being unknown at the time of this survey.
13
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
B) 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile, HA 11**: The asbestos-containing 12”x12” Black Mottle
Pattern Floor Tile is present in Rooms 4158, 4158A, 4160, 4160A, and 4160B. There is
approximately 1,650 square feet of this tile present I these rooms, with the actual amount of this
material to be impacted by the Project being unknown at the time of this survey. The mastic
associated with this tile (HA 03) was reported as “No Asbestos Detected
4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS
This Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey was limited to ONLY accessible rooms/spaces included
in the Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project renovation area. The
associated rooms, spaces and areas which were accessible were inspected and sampled as a
part of this survey. Inaccessible areas such as wall cavities, fixed/hard ceiling plenum spaces
and enclosed pipe chases were not included as a part of this Survey. Any suspect materials
present in areas not accessible or not included as a part of this Survey shall be assumed ACM
when encountered, until tested.
14
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
APPENDIX A
Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form
860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel:607.231.6600 Fax:607.231.6640
www.delta-eas.com
2019.003.108
Date(s) Sampling Performed: 07/31/2019
Date of Report: 08/05/2019
Building Code:
Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result
Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos
2019.003.108 - 01A 01 4
Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant - Corridor Adjacent
to Room 4160.Miscellaneous ND ND ND
2019.003.108 - 01B 01 4
Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant - Corridor Adjacent
to Room 4160.Miscellaneous ND ND ND
2019.003.108 - 02A 02 4
Yellow Mastic from 4" Dark Brown Vinyl Cove
Base - Room 4160A.Miscellaneous ND ND ND
2019.003.108 - 02B 02 4
Yellow Mastic from 4" Dark Brown Vinyl Cove
Base - Room 4158A.Miscellaneous ND ND ND
2019.003.108 - 03A 03 4
Black Mastic from 12"x12" Black Mottled Floor Tile
- Room 4160A.Miscellaneous ND ND ND
2019.003.108 - 03B 03 4
Black Mastic from 12"x12" Black Mottled Floor Tile
- Room 4158A.Miscellaneous ND ND ND
2019.003.108 - 04A 04 4 Black Trespa Countertop - Room 4160A.Miscellaneous ND ND ND
2019.003.108 - 04B 04 4 Black Trespa Countertop - Room 4160B.Miscellaneous ND ND ND
Task Authorization No.: TA-108 / Work Order No.: 11898216
Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 08 / TEM - 08
Delta Proj. No.:
HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop
TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition
Number of Samples Collected: 08
Number
Client: Cornell University
Asbestos Inspector(s): Michael C. Drobak
Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form
Sample
Laboratory: AmeriSci, NY Labs
HA*Floor
Project: Snee Hall 4th Floor Rooms
4158/4160A/4160B Mass Spectrometer
Exhaust Replacement Asbestos Survey
2049
Cornell University Snee Hall
4th Floor Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement
Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Page 1 of 1
15
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
APPENDIX B
Laboratory Analytical Results
16
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com
APPENDIX C
Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors
Company and Personnel Certifications
New York State – Department of Labor
Division of Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12
Albany, NY 12240
ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE
Delta Engineers & Architects & Land Surveyors, P.C. 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760
FILE NUMBER: 05-0851 LICENSE NUMBER: 29322 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF ISSUE: 09/12/2018 EXPIRATION DATE: 09/30/2019
Duly Authorized Representative – Stephen Prislupsky:
This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material.
This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor.
Eileen M. Franko, Director
SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor
17
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com
APPENDIX D
Laboratory Certifications
18
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com
APPENDIX E
Survey Location / Limits & Bulk Sample Location Drawings
Survey Location / Limits
860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600 : Fax: 607.231.6651
www.delta-eas.com
Delta Project No.: 2019.003.108 Project Name: Snee Hall 4th Floor Mass Spectrometer
Installation Project
Work Area: Rooms 4158, 4158A, 4160,
4160A & 4160B
Client: Cornell University
Bulk Sample Type:
Bldg. No.: 2049 Page: of 1 1
Scale: NTS Drawn By: M. Drobak Date(s) Sampled: 07/31/2019
N
03A 04A
01B
01A
02A
04B 02B
03B
19
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com
APPENDIX F
Photo Log
20
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com
HA 01: Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant
No Asbestos Detected
HA 02: Yellow Mastic from non-suspect 4” Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base, No Asbestos Detected
21
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com
HA 03: Black Mastic from 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile, No Asbestos Detected
HA 04: Black Trespa Countertop, No Asbestos Detected
22
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com
HA 05*: Fume Hood Transite Panels
Visually Confirmed to be Asbestos-Containing Transite
HA’s 06**, 07**, 08** & 09** - Brown Drywall/ associated Joint Compound & White Drywall/
associated Joint Compound, All No Asbestos Detected
23
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com
HA 10** - White Caulk, No Asbestos Detected
HA 11** - Black Mottled Floor Tile, Asbestos-Containing
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.deltaengineers.com
AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
August 27, 2013
Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator
Cornell University
Maintenance Management
116 Humphreys Service Building
Ithaca, New York 14853-3701
Re: Snee Hall Building 2049 - Suspect Asbestos Material Overview
Dear Mr. Houseknecht:
The following information is associated with the various “suspect” building materials present at Snee Hall
(Building 2049). It should be noted that a comprehensive “Full Building” Asbestos Survey has not been
performed at Snee Hall and other suspect building materials not listed/included below are known to be
present in the Building. As per the requirements of the NYS Department of Labor, OSHA and
NESHAPS, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for all Renovation Projects addressing the
affected renovation areas and the associated suspect materials present in each. When these “other”
undocumented suspect materials are encountered, they should be considered “Presumed Asbestos
Containing Materials” or “assumed” asbestos containing materials until proven otherwise by a given
project’s Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey.
Based on previous Delta sampling efforts and bulk sample information from Cornell University’s 4D Database,
the following is a breakdown of known Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM’s) and known Non-Asbestos
Materials. For the Asbestos Containing Materials, they should be considered to be asbestos containing wherever
present in the Building. For each Non-Asbestos Material, the given material was either sampled as a part of the
facility-wide Snee Hall Telecommunications Survey or included in the Cornell 4D Database, so the material
classification is applicable for the given material wherever present in the Building.
1) Asbestos Containing Materials:
Counter-Top Black Mastic
12”x 12” Dark Brown Floor Tile
12”x 12” Black Mottled Floor Tile
2) Non-Asbestos Materials:
- White Grout from 2” x 2” Ceramic Wall Tile
- Mortar from 2” x 2” Ceramic Wall Tile
- Brown Drywall
- Joint Compound from Brown Drywall
- White Caulk
- 1’ x 1’ Splined Fissured Ceiling Tile
- 1’ x 1’ adhered Fissured Ceiling Tile
- Brown Glue Pucks from 1’ x 1’ Adhered Fissured Ceiling Tile
- 2’ x 2’ Recessed “Line” Patterned Ceiling Tile
- White Drywall
- Joint Compound from White Drywall
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 2 of 2
AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
Again, as per applicable State and Federal requirements, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for
every individual Renovation Project to assure all suspect materials with the potential to be impacted by the
given project’s scope are identified as ACM vs. Non-ACM and dealt with accordingly. A given project’s survey
must be performed by a New York State Department of Labor/EPA Certified Asbestos Inspector and would
include a review of the existing “known” ACM’s and Non-ACM’s along with the collection and analysis of
bulk samples for those suspect materials encountered that have not been previously identified. If you have any
questions, or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience.
Respectfully,
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C.
Stephen Prislupsky
Director of Environmental Services
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
October 7, 2019
Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Facilities Coordinator Projects II
Cornell University IPP – Facilities Management
FM Administration
116 Humphreys Service Building
Ithaca, New York 14853-3701
Re: Olin Hall Building 2024 – Suspect Asbestos Material Overview
Dear Mr. Houseknecht:
The following information is associated with the various “suspect” building materials present at Olin Hall
(Building 2024). It should be noted that sampling of all suspect exterior building materials present
at Olin Hall has not been performed. When these undocumented suspect exterior building
materials are encountered, they should be considered “Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials”
or “assumed” asbestos containing materials until proven otherwise by a given project’s Pre-
Renovation Asbestos Survey. As per the requirements of the NYS Department of Labor, OSHA
and NESHAPS, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for all Renovation Projects
addressing the affected renovation areas and the associated suspect materials present in each.
Based on Delta’s Full Building Interior Survey and limited exterior building materials asbestos bulk
sampling efforts, the following is a breakdown of known Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM’s) and
known Non-Asbestos Materials. For the Asbestos Containing Materials, they should be considered to be
asbestos containing wherever present in the Building. For each Non-Asbestos Material, the given
material was sampled as a part of the full building interior Asbestos Survey, so the material classification
is applicable for the given material wherever present in the Building.
1) Asbestos Containing Materials:
• All Non-Foam / Non-Fiberglass Pipe and Pipe Fitting Insulation
• Dark Brown 12" x 12" Floor Tile
• White w/ Brown Streaks 12" x 12" Floor Tile
• Green Mottle Pattern 12” x 12” Floor Tile
• Light Grey w/ White Spec 12” x 12” Floor Tile
• All Colors/Patterns of 9” x 9” Floor Tile
• Interior Black Tar Waterproofing on Brick Walls
• Exterior Window Frame Caulk from Original Window System
• Exterior Window Glazing Compound from Original Window System
• Brown Exterior Door Frame Caulk
• Black Glazing Compound from Door Windows
• Black Fire Curtain
• Transite Bench-tops / Lab-Tops
• Felt Paper from Roofing Vapor Barrier System
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 2 of 3
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
2) Non-Asbestos Materials:
• White w/Gray Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic
• White w/Dark Gray Streaks 12" x 12” Floor Tile and its associated Mastic
• Tan Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic
• Dark Grey Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic
• Grey Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic
• Black Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic
• Black Mastic from all colors / patterns of asbestos containing 9” x 9” Floor Tile
• Mastic from asbestos containing Dark Brown 12" x 12" Floor Tile
• Mastic from asbestos containing White w/Brown Streaks 12" x 12" Floor Tile
• Mastic from asbestos containing Green Mottle Pattern 12” x 12” Floor Tile
• Mastic from asbestos containing Light Grey w/ White Spec 12” x 12” Floor Tile
• Grey Sheet Flooring and its associated Mastic
• Blue Sheet Flooring and its associated Mastic
• Light Green w/ Gray Sheet Vinyl Flooring and its associated mastic
• Speckled Blue Sheet Flooring and its associated Paper Backing / Mastic
• Grey Epoxy Flooring
• All Colors of Carpet Mastics/Adhesives
• Raised Floor Panels and associated Yellow Mastic
• Raised Floor Pedestal Mastic
• Black Mastic from Quarry Tile Flooring
• Mastic from non-suspect vinyl flooring transition strips
• All Colors of Floor Levelers
• All Colors/Sizes of Cove Base and their associated Mastics
• Grout/Mortar Bed for all Colors/Sizes of Ceramic Wall Tile and Ceramic Floor Tiles
• All Colors/Ages of Sheetrock/Gypsum Board
• All Colors/Ages of Joint Compound
• Skim-Coat Wall Plasters
• All Single-Coat and Two-Coat Wall and Ceiling Plasters
• Mastic from non-suspect Wall Fabric
• Mastic from Wood Wall Paneling
• Mastics/Adhesives from All Acoustical Wall Panels
• Perlite Insulation Board
• All Colors/Patterns of Wall Coverings/Wall Paper and their associated Mastics/Adhesives
• Yellow Mastic from Wall Cork Board
• Yellow Adhesive from Chalk Boards / Wall-mounted Boards
• Spray-on Fireproofing (Confirmed though SOF-V 198.8 Analysis)
• All Sizes/Patterns of Suspended Ceiling Tiles
• All Patterns of 12” x 12” Adhered Ceiling Tiles and their associated Mastics/Adhesives
• Paper Wrap/Covering/Tape on non-suspect fiberglass pipe insulation
• Fiberglass Pipe Insulation End Sealant
• Hot Water Tank Insulation Silver Wrap
• White Seam Tape from metal ductwork
• All Colors of Duct Seam/Joint Sealant
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 3 of 3
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
2) Non-Asbestos Materials (continued):
• Red Fire Stop
• Grey Fire Stop
• All Electrical Conduit Caulks
• Window Frame Caulk from Glass Block Windows
• Glazing Compound from Glass Block Windows
• Frame Caulk from In-Fill Window Panels
• All Colors of Interior Door Frame Caulks
• All Door Core Materials
• Non-Transite Bench-tops/Lab-tops and associated Adhesives/Mastics/Seam Epoxies
• Black Sink Undercoating
• Exterior Foundation White Parging
• Exterior Foundation Black Waterproofing
• Black Paper Backing from roofing ISO Board
• Hot-Mop Tar from Roofing Vapor Barrier System
• Lap Sealant from EPDM Roof System
Again, as per applicable State and Federal requirements, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required
for every individual Renovation Project to assure all suspect materials with the potential to be impacted
by the given project’s scope are identified as ACM vs. Non-ACM and dealt with accordingly. A given
project’s survey must be performed by a New York State Department of Labor/EPA Certified Asbestos
Inspector and would include a review of the existing “known” ACM’s and Non-ACM’s along with the
collection and analysis of bulk samples for those suspect materials encountered that have not been
previously identified. If you have any questions, or require any other information, please feel free to
contact me at your convenience.
Respectfully,
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC
Stephen Prislupsky
Director of Environmental Services
APPENDIX B
Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and
Chain-of-Custody Records
APPENDIX C
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
Asbestos License and Certificates
New York State – Department of Labor
Division of Safety and Health
License and Certificate Unit
State Campus, Building 12
Albany, NY 12240
ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
443 Electronics Parkway
Liverpool, NY 13088
FILE NUMBER: 99-0130
LICENSE NUMBER: 29267
LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED
DATE OF ISSUE: 02/14/2019
EXPIRATION DATE: 02/29/2020
Duly Authorized Representative – Scott D Nostrand:
This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material.
This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor.
Eileen M. Franko, Director
SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor
APPENDIX D
Laboratory Certificates
www.bartonandloguidice.com
Appendix B
Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and
Chain‐of‐Custody Records
AmeriSci New York
117 EAST 30TH ST.
NEW YORK, NY 10016
TEL: (212) 679-8600 • FAX: (212) 679-3114
03/22/21 AmeriSci Job #221033090
03/24/21
ELAP #11480 1 2
2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University -
Snee Hall
PLM Bulk Asbestos Report
Date Received
Date Examined
RE:
ofPage
P.O. #
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
443 Electronics Parkway
Liverpool, NY 13088
Attn:John E. Rigge
Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No.
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLTL-1-1 221033090-01 NAD
1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling Tile1
White/Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 15.7%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLTL-1-2 221033090-02 NAD
1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling Tile1
White/Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 19.8%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLGL-2-1 221033090-03 NAD
Brown Ceiling Tile Glue2
Brown, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 46.5%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLGL-2-2 221033090-04 NAD
Brown Ceiling Tile Glue2
Brown, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 44.9%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCANVAS-3-1 221033090-05 NAD
Corkboard Canvas Cover3
Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 16.1%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
See Reporting notes on last page
AmeriSci Job #:221033090 Page 2 of 2
2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University -
Snee Hall
PLM Bulk Asbestos Report
Client Name:Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No.
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCANVAS-3-2 221033090-06 NAD
Corkboard Canvas Cover3
Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 15.5%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLGL-4-1 221033090-07 NAD
Tan Ceiling Tile Glue4
Tan, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 25.7%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLGL-4-2 221033090-08 NAD
Tan Ceiling Tile Glue4
Tan, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 32.5%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Reporting Notes:
*NAD/NSD =no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop, (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite;
(SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis using Olympus, Model BH-2 Pol Scope, Microscope, Serial #: 229915, by
Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of
vermiculite or ELAP 198.6 for NOB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600-M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab 11480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in
detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently
the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA
Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must
not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA-LAP, LLC Lab ID 102843, RI Cert
AAL-094, CT Cert PH-0186, Mass Cert AA000054, NJ Lab ID #NY031.
____________END OF REPORT___________
Analyzed by: Valeriu Voicu
Date: 3/24/2021
Reviewed by: John P. Koubiadis
Client Name:
221033090
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University - Snee Hall
AmeriSci Job #:Page 1 of 1
Table I
Summary of Bulk Asbestos Analysis Results
Client Sample#
Sample
Weight
(gram)
Heat
Sensitive
Organic %
Acid
Soluble
Inorganic %
Insoluble
Non-Asbestos
Inorganic %HG
Area
** Asbestos % by
PLM/DS
** Asbestos % by
TEM
AmeriSci
Sample #
01 CLTL-1-1 1 0.270 13.4 70.9 15.7 NAD NAD
1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling TileLocation:
02 CLTL-1-2 1 0.217 15.2 65.0 19.8 NAD NAD
1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling TileLocation:
03 CLGL-2-1 2 0.199 50.7 2.8 46.5 NAD NAD
Brown Ceiling Tile GlueLocation:
04 CLGL-2-2 2 0.208 50.7 4.4 44.9 NAD NAD
Brown Ceiling Tile GlueLocation:
05 CANVAS-3-1 3 0.082 80.4 3.6 16.1 NAD NAD
Corkboard Canvas CoverLocation:
06 CANVAS-3-2 3 0.097 80.0 4.5 15.5 NAD NAD
Corkboard Canvas CoverLocation:
07 CLGL-4-1 4 0.264 32.3 41.9 25.7 NAD NAD
Tan Ceiling Tile GlueLocation:
08 CLGL-4-2 4 0.361 32.9 34.6 32.5 NAD NAD
Tan Ceiling Tile GlueLocation:
**Quantitative Analysis (Semi/Full); Bulk Asbestos Analysis - PLM by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 or NYSDOH ELAP 198.1 for New York friable samples or NYSDOH ELAP 198.6 for New York NOB samples;
TEM (Semi/Full) by EPA 600/R-93/116 (or NYSDOH ELAP 198.4; for New York samples). Analysis using Hitachi, Model H7000-Noran 7 System, Microscope, Serial #: 747-05-06. NAD = no asbestos detected
during a quantitative analysis; NA = not analyzed; Trace = <1%; (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite; (SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; Quantitation for beginning
weights of <0.1 grams should be considered as qualitative only; Qualitative Analysis: Asbestos analysis results of "Present" or "NVA = No Visible Asbestos" represents results for Qualitative PLM or TEM
Analysis only (no accreditation coverage available from any regulatory agency for qualitative analyses): NVLAP (PLM) 200546-0, NYSDOH ELAP Lab 11480, AIHA-LAP, LLC (PLM) Lab ID 102843, NJ Lab ID
#NY031.
Warning Note: PLM limitation, only TEM will resolve fibers <0.25 micrometers in diameter. TEM bulk analysis is representative of the fine grained matrix material and may not be representative of non-
uniformly dispersed debris for which PLM evaluation is recommended (i.e. soils and other heterogenous materials).
Analyzed by: John P. Koubiadis
Date: 3/25/2021
Reviewed by: John P. Koubiadis
ffimw qpm
effircxx*##mw
Client Chiang O'Brien Architects
Location: Cornell University
Bulk Sample Ghain-of-Custody
11 Centre Park
Suite 203
Rochester, NY 14614
585-325-71 90 Fax: 31 5-325-4856
2289.003.001
Date Sampled:3t19t2A21
1'x1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling Tile
Ceiling Tile Glue
Tan Ceiling Tile Glue
Polarized Light Microscopyl x
|a,oo ", orst positive (> than 1olo asbestos) in each sampre series.elru - uoa I r lAdvance ro TEM if pLM resutt is 1olo asbestos of tess
Email: Mike Goff
Email: Dave Morse
nrg"---]-ot {
#221 0 5 5 0 I0
AmeriSci New York
117 EAST 30TH ST.
NEW YORK, NY 10016
TEL: (212) 679-8600 • FAX: (212) 679-3114
03/22/21 AmeriSci Job #221033091
03/24/21
ELAP #11480 1 2
2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University,
Olin Hall
PLM Bulk Asbestos Report
Date Received
Date Examined
RE:
ofPage
P.O. #
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
443 Electronics Parkway
Liverpool, NY 13088
Attn:John E. Rigge
Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No.
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLLI-1-1 221033091-01 NAD
2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray Fleck1
White/Beige, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material
Fibrous glass 20%, Non-fibrous 52.7%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLLI-1-2 221033091-02 NAD
2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray Fleck1
White/Beige, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material
Fibrous glass 25%, Non-fibrous 43.9%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoBENCH-2-1 221033091-03 NAD
Lab Bench2
Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Cementitious, Bulk Material
Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100%
(by NYS ELAP 198.1)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoBENCH-2-2 221033091-04 NAD
Lab Bench2
Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Cementitious, Bulk Material
Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100%
(by NYS ELAP 198.1)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoBENCH-2-3 221033091-05 NAD
Lab Bench2
Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Cementitious, Bulk Material
Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100%
(by NYS ELAP 198.1)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
See Reporting notes on last page
AmeriSci Job #:221033091 Page 2 of 2
2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University,
Olin Hall
PLM Bulk Asbestos Report
Client Name:Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No.
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLLI-3-1 221033091-06 NAD
2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling Panel3
White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 52.3%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLLI-3-2 221033091-07 NAD
2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling Panel3
White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 43.3%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLLI-4-1 221033091-08 NAD
2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling Panel4
White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 52.4%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
NoCLLI-4-2 221033091-09 NAD
2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling Panel4
White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 49.2%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 03/24/21
Reporting Notes:
*NAD/NSD =no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop, (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite;
(SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis using Olympus, Model BH-2 Pol Scope, Microscope, Serial #: 229915, by
Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of
vermiculite or ELAP 198.6 for NOB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600-M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab 11480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in
detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently
the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA
Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must
not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA-LAP, LLC Lab ID 102843, RI Cert
AAL-094, CT Cert PH-0186, Mass Cert AA000054, NJ Lab ID #NY031.
____________END OF REPORT___________
Analyzed by: Valeriu Voicu
Date: 3/24/2021
Reviewed by: Aleks Barengolts
Client Name:
221033091
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University, Olin Hall
AmeriSci Job #:Page 1 of 1
Table I
Summary of Bulk Asbestos Analysis Results
Client Sample#
Sample
Weight
(gram)
Heat
Sensitive
Organic %
Acid
Soluble
Inorganic %
Insoluble
Non-Asbestos
Inorganic %HG
Area
** Asbestos % by
PLM/DS
** Asbestos % by
TEM
AmeriSci
Sample #
01 CLLI-1-1 1 0.100 16.3 11.0 72.7 NAD NAD
2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray FleckLocation:
02 CLLI-1-2 1 0.142 16.1 15.0 68.9 NAD NAD
2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray FleckLocation:
03 BENCH-2-1 2 ----------------NAD NA
Lab BenchLocation:
04 BENCH-2-2 2 ----------------NAD NA
Lab BenchLocation:
05 BENCH-2-3 2 ----------------NAD NA
Lab BenchLocation:
06 CLLI-3-1 3 0.163 28.7 19.0 52.3 NAD NAD
2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation:
07 CLLI-3-2 3 0.085 31.6 25.1 43.3 NAD NAD
2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation:
08 CLLI-4-1 4 0.177 25.7 21.9 52.4 NAD NAD
2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation:
09 CLLI-4-2 4 0.142 28.1 22.7 49.2 NAD NAD
2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation:
**Quantitative Analysis (Semi/Full); Bulk Asbestos Analysis - PLM by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 or NYSDOH ELAP 198.1 for New York friable samples or NYSDOH ELAP 198.6 for New York NOB samples;
TEM (Semi/Full) by EPA 600/R-93/116 (or NYSDOH ELAP 198.4; for New York samples). Analysis using Hitachi, Model H600-Noran 7 System, Microscope, Serial #: 542-26-10. NAD = no asbestos detected
during a quantitative analysis; NA = not analyzed; Trace = <1%; (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite; (SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; Quantitation for beginning
weights of <0.1 grams should be considered as qualitative only; Qualitative Analysis: Asbestos analysis results of "Present" or "NVA = No Visible Asbestos" represents results for Qualitative PLM or TEM
Analysis only (no accreditation coverage available from any regulatory agency for qualitative analyses): NVLAP (PLM) 200546-0, NYSDOH ELAP Lab 11480, AIHA-LAP, LLC (PLM) Lab ID 102843, NJ Lab ID
#NY031.
Warning Note: PLM limitation, only TEM will resolve fibers <0.25 micrometers in diameter. TEM bulk analysis is representative of the fine grained matrix material and may not be representative of non-
uniformly dispersed debris for which PLM evaluation is recommended (i.e. soils and other heterogenous materials).
Analyzed by: Aleks Barengolts
Date: 3/24/2021
Reviewed by: Aleks Barengolts
ffiBmmgsptr?
effimx-x*q#$ce
Bulk Sampte Chain-of_Custody
11 Centre park
Suite 203
Rochester, Ny 14614
585-325-71 90 Fax: 31 5_325_4856
Project No.:
Date Sampled:
Samoled bv:
2289.003.001
3t19t2021
-
MDG/JRC
Smooth White Vinyl CovereO
Panel M Grey FleckBENCH-2-1,2,3
2'x4'Deep Long Fissure Ceiling
Panel
Long Fissure Ceiling panet
Polarized Light Microscoorfr,o,
", rrst positive (> th,'-, _ * o, p^.; ;""; ;;;:J:#:1'"," *:"":::::,,. *,.".
rmail: Dave Morse Br 72hrs TAT il*tsbartonan.r^^,,;,
rqlLr t{:
p"s"J.r l_#221055091
Appendix C
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
Asbestos License and Certificates
New York State – Department of Labor
Division of Safety and Health
License and Certificate Unit
State Campus, Building 12
Albany, NY 12240
ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
443 Electronics Parkway
Liverpool, NY 13088
FILE NUMBER: 99-0130
LICENSE NUMBER: 29267
LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED
DATE OF ISSUE: 01/26/2021
EXPIRATION DATE: 02/28/2022
Duly Authorized Representative – Scott D Nostrand:
This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material.
This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor.
Eileen M. Franko, Director
SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor
Appendix D
Laboratory Certificates
www.bartonandloguidice.com
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood
to reduce or eliminate such requirements.
C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals:
1. Analytical laboratory sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials (“borrow”).
2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan.
3. Weight tickets from the Borrow Material Supplier.
4. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management.
5. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials.
6. Copies of manifests for all waste materials disposed of off-site.
1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS JUNE 2, 2021
B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications.
1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE
A. In accordance with Section 01 14 00, only that portion of the working area that is absolutely necessary and essential for the work shall be cleared for construction. All clearing should be approved and performed to provide minimum practical exposure of soils.
B. The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid the destruction of plants, trees, shrubs and lawns outside the area of construction so as not to unduly disturb the ecological or environmental quality of the area.
C. Topsoil excavated as part of the Project, which can be reused as part of the Project, shall be stockpiled for future use and temporarily stabilized to prevent erosion.
1.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements
1.7 DUST CONTROL
A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction.
B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to control dust.
C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS JUNE 2, 2021
1.8 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to:
1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations.
2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters.
3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters.
4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities.
5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative.
6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream.
7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work.
C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer
authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer.
D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures.
1.9 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK
A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS JUNE 2, 2021
The following shall require approval of the Owner:
1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections.
2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions.
B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s
Representative.
1.10 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS
A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its
performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith.
B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance.
C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder.
D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal.
1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE
A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations.
B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-5 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at
the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 43***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION
A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects:
1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site.
2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products.
3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes.
B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials.
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES
All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the following procedures shall be followed:
A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall:
1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area.
3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not
compromise worker safety.
a. Stop the spill at once (if possible).
b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.).
c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area.
d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread.
e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source.
f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill.
g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified.
h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion.
i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment.
B. Spill Cleanup:
1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated.
a. Use proper waste containers.
b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container.
c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid.
e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill.
f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product.
g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor.
h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B.
C. Fire or Explosion:
1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall:
a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified.
b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel.
c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area.
d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so.
e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers.
f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION
In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required.
The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING
CRITERIA DESCRIPTION
Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons.
Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment.
Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious
surface.
Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water.
A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802.
Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible:
1. The date and time of the spill or release.
2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance.
3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event.
4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill.
5. The source of the release or spill.
6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill.
7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site.
9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation.
10. The extent of injuries, if any.
11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals.
12. Assistance required, if any.
If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following:
1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675.
2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases.
(1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you.
(2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3).
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 44***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES
A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street use and building demolition.
1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition.
C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained through the City of Ithaca.
D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting:
1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State.
2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration –Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for this type of work.
3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department.
1.2 INSPECTIONS
A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner.
B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 41 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings.
B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents.
C. Install All Work in Compliance with:
1. NYS Uniform Code
a. International Building Code
b. International Residential Code
c. International Existing Building Code
d. International Fire Code
e. International Plumbing Code
f. International Mechanical Code
g. International Fuel Gas Code
h. International Property Maintenance Code
i. Uniform Code Supplement
2. NYS Energy Code
a. International Energy Conservation Code
b. ASHRAE 90.1
c. Energy Code Supplement
3. National Electric Code
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101.
6. All local ordinances
7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement.
C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials
and equipment incorporated in such construction.
E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation.
F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized representative.
G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction Agreement contract is made by Owner.
H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor.
I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval.
J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.”
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position.
P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for.
Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable.
S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed.
T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the course of project construction.
V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The “record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor.
W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for some portion of the work.
X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged.
Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract.
Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the
contractor for construction purposes.
AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor;
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS
A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades
Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows: All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement.
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888
www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100
www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772
www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208
www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch
Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690
www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org
NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393
www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622
www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580
www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SBI Steel Boiler Institute
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-14 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331
STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-15 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700
Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943
www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 NEC National Electric Code
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112
www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 42 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
OLIN HALL B01, 101 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities,
instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program.
1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION
A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection:
1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation
meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products.
a. Agenda to include the following:
i. Appointment
ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project.
iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required.
iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements.
v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements.
vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work.
vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration.
viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section 01500.
ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review of the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
OLIN HALL B01, 101 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410.
xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment.
xii. Special safety requirements and procedures.
b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting:
i. Project Manager.
ii. Project Field Supervisor
iii. Subcontractor
iv. Architect’s Representative
v. Owner’s Representative
vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable
vii. Testing Agency, when applicable
2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine
materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand.
3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements.
4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work.
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS
A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
OLIN HALL B01, 101 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.4 TESTING
A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements.
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents.
1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track non-conforming materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s Representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor and by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion of all other work, or as Cornell University may
direct.
B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate, maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and
services.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option.
B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications.
2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES
A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site.
B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services and hospitals.
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and
establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021
1. Impairments “Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments
a. Partial Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed.
- Basic Impairment Notification will be sent to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global.
- No fire watch will be required in most cases.
b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed.
- Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service.
- Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Equipment:
1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard.
2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards.
3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system.
4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building.
5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas.
6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting.
7. Where existing or temporary fire protection services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021
8. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during
construction.
C. Enforce fire-safety discipline:
1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location.
2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project.
3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions.
4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings.
5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions.
6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel.
D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher.
E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety.
F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness, tie-off points, and other such equipment.
B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel.
C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition.
2.5 SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021
B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall be designed by the Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same.
2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior, maintain in-place until installation of permanent enclosures. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities, and as necessary
to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, provide weather protection for occupied areas, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets.
2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials.
3. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.
4. Coordinate enclosure with ventilation requirements, material drying or curing requirements, and specified environmental limitations to avoid dangerous or detrimental conditions and effects.
B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from construction work.
1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards.
a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture.
b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations.
2. Do not remove existing exterior enclosure systems until new exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing exterior enclosure systems as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new exterior enclosure systems and complete installation as soon as possible.
3. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior enclosure systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new HVAC systems and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021
2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free of water at all times.
B. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor.
2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION
A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction site.
1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards.
2. Closed sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades.
3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees.
2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner.
B. Owner Construction Project Sign. The Contractor shall install Owner provided project identification signage.
2.10 SECURITY
A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner.
2.11 FIELD OFFICES
A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021
1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work.
2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 02 through 40.
B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout.
C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner.
D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation.
E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site.
F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week.
G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner.
3.3 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services:
1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction.
2. At completion of the Project.
B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal.
C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition.
1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and utilities.
2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area.
***END OF SECTION 01 50 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work.
B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition.
B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER
A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to
meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor.
C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in
all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code.
E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting to be provided is as follows:
1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside of the construction fence.
2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel.
F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat.
G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of
the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns.
H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal
The Contractor shall:
1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby.
2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner.
2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR
A. Use of Existing Elevator
1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall:
a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
b. Provide for the maintenance and cleaning of the elevator equipment as approved by the Owner's Representative.
c. Prior to start of construction, accurately record the condition of the existing elevator. Promptly repair or replace items that are damaged as a result of Contractor’s use. Service calls that arise as a result of Contractor misuse will be charged to the Contractor. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use.
d. Use only elevators designated by Owner’s Representative at dates and times designated by Owner’s Representative. Dates and times available for Contractor’s use shall be scheduled with, and at the convenience of, the Owner, and may vary during the course of the Project.
e. Owner will not provide elevator operators or other monitoring of elevator use.
f. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
g. Provide code compliant protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator maintenance contractor to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
h. Procure and coordinate the elevator maintenance contractor to gain access to the elevator shaft as required to complete the work
2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the Work.
B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating system shall in no way constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work.
C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts, lubrication, operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing.
1. If the Contractor elects to use the building’s permanent heating system for temporary heat, the Contractor shall provide filters with a minimum MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system, maintain to keep them free of dust and debris, replace if necessary and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout.
D. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required.
E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
F. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture
intrusion that is detrimental to the Project.
2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times.
B. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work.
2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during construction. The Contractor shall maintain neat, clean and sanitary conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with excessive custodial services associated with such usage.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities.
C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 51 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source.
B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas.
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space.
C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation.
E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged.
F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage.
1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE
A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution.
B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds.
C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus.
E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored
materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work.
F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment.
1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE
A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road or other Campus site shall be stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely
responsible for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss. Due to work at the Palm Road lot, staging space is limited and not guaranteed to be provided. If staging space is needed a request should be submitted to the Project Manager. B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident or injury occurring at Palm Road storage or other assigned Campus site associated with the Contractor’s storage. C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding any security at the Palm Road or other assigned Campus site. D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found. E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all contractors, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an
investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally. F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm Road or any Campus site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
G. The Contractor will be responsible for securing and maintaining any Campus site area designated to them. All contractor trailers or storage containers located on Cornell Campus Property will need to file for a building permit with the Town of Ithaca. If the trailer/container is there longer than 180 days, the trailer/container will need to meet the
Building Code requirements of a permanent structure. The trailer/container will need a means of egress that can be operated from the inside and a fire extinguisher. The contractor will also need to file for a demolition permit when the trailer/container is removed. H. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579, Email – db@ithacaplastics.com.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished
by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work.
B. Protection of Utilities
1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage.
2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation.
C. Protective Covering
1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows:
a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately
against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades.
b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks,
gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner.
c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels.
d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc.
2. HVAC ductwork shall be protected by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction of contaminants:
a. Ductwork with interior lining shall be wrapped at the factory using plastic wrap to exclude moisture and contaminants. The wrapping shall not be removed until immediately prior to installation.
b. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or contaminants at any point in the manufacturing, shipping, storage or installation process.
c. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the weather.
d. Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles.
e. Once installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the construction process.
1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas.
C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel.
D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage:
1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic.
2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects.
3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur.
E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces:
1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 66 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes.
B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative:
1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work.
2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified.
3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work.
4. Patch work uncovered or removed.
C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof.
D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative.
E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.
F. Openings and Chases
1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract.
2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include:
1. Identification of the Project.
2. Description of the affected work.
3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation.
4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project.
5. Description of the proposed work:
a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
d. The extent of refinishing to be done.
6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation.
7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching.
8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected.
B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following:
a. Foundation construction
b. Bearing and retaining walls
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
c. Structural concrete
d. Structural steel and lintels
e. Structural decking
f. Miscellaneous structural metals
g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems
h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports
i. Equipment supports
B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment
b. Air or smoke barriers
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers
d. Membranes and flashings
e. Fire protection systems
f. Control systems
g. Communication systems
h. Electrical wiring systems
i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner.
D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner.
1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes
a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane.
2. Water Tightness
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight.
b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight.
c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 WARRANTIES
A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved.
B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will
equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of in-place or existing materials.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during:
1. Cutting and patching.
2. Excavation and backfilling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.
C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties.
D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water.
E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-6 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:
a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.
4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance.
5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials.
8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-7 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition.
a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim, base sheets, base flashing, adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards, accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top mounted items.
D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work.
F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
***END OF SECTION 01 73 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INSPECTIONS
A. Substantial Completion:
1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list),
indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete.
3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective.
4. All work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so, delegated by the Ithaca Building Department.
a. A member of the Ithaca Fire Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS.
b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS and NFPA.
c. The Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions:
- Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
- Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from the rest of the system
- Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump.
- A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components.
- A Fire Alarm System where the wiring or control circuits have been modified.
- A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced.
- A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified
- An alternative fire suppression system that has been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement.
- A modification or extension of the piping for a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic test is required by NFPA 14.
B. Final Acceptance:
1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect. After receipt of this notification and Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work will be furnished to the Contractor.
2. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems.
B. Contractor's Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion.
C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications.
2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned.
3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring.
5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition.
6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean.
7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning.
8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Cleaning of Renovated Duct Systems and Existing Duct Systems in Renovated Areas:
1. Cleaning work shall be performed by firm which has minimum three (3) years’ experience in mechanical cleaning of air systems. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics, technicians and experienced supervisors.
2. Clean dirt, dust and debris from air units, associated equipment air ducts; sanitize same. Cleaning shall include:
a. Cleaning of air unit’s supply, return and exhaust sections including coils, fans, filter racks, outdoor air intake shaft, and interior surfaces.
b. Cleaning of dampers, heating coils, humidifiers, and similar devices in ductwork.
c. Marking of duct-mounted damper settings, prior to cleaning, and returning dampers to marked positions after cleaning. This includes fire dampers, zone dampers, balancing dampers and volume dampers.
d. Cleaning of terminal supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers and diffusers.
e. Cutting of access holes in ductwork for cleaning process, as well as sealing and patching of same.
f. Removal of portions of duct system which cannot otherwise be thoroughly cleaned, and replacement thereof.
g. Sealing of lined duct systems, upon completion.
h. Removal and reinstallation of ceiling panels, tiles, ceiling support tracks, and other ceiling construction, as required to facilitate cleaning.
i. Providing access doors required to facilitate cleaning.
3. Cleaning shall meet National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards, capable of verification by NADCA Vacuum Test. Cleanliness shall be subject to Architect’s visual review; provide re-cleaning as necessary to satisfy Architect
a. Cleaning methods may include vacuuming, brushing, mechanical brushing, scraping, or air washing. Use method best suited for locations involved.
b. Do NOT use methods which could damage the system or the building.
c. Remove dirt, dust, lint and other accumulations by HEPA filtered air machine capable of minimum 6000 cfm. Air machine shall operate to obtain 1250 fpm across the work space. Use brushes, mechanical agitators or air whips to dislodge contaminants to be collected by the air machine.
d. Cleaning shall begin at the furthest point of the return system and at the outdoor air intake. Cleaning shall proceed toward the air handling equipment. Cleaning shall finish at the furthest point of the supply ductwork.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 77 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
OLIN HALL B01, 101 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template.
B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall include:
1. Name of Product
2. Equipment Classification
3. Manufacturer
4. Model Number
5. Serial Number
6. Cost
7. Location (including Building and Room Number)
8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation)
C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its’ disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using an electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects.
E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals) to the Owner’s Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
OLIN HALL B01, 101 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST
• Building Equipment
• AC Drive/VSD
• Air Dryer
• Backflow Preventor
• Air Compressor
• Building
• Sprinkler
• Control
• Vacuum
• Pump
• Condensate
• Glycol
• CWC
• HWC
• Potable
• Sanitary Sewer
• Storm Sewer
• Sump
• Quality Water
• Fuel
• Fan
• Exhaust
• Supply
• Return
• Fume Hood
• Furnace
• Generator
• Hot Water Heater
• Heat Exchangers
• Boiler
• Tank
• Unit Heater
• Fan Coil
• VAV Box
• Transfer Switch
• Motor
• Pump
• Fan
• Lift/Levelers
• Water Softener
• Reverse Osmosis
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
OLIN HALL B01, 101 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 22***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work.
2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to the Owner prior to substantial completion.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems.
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Submit a CD with electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in final form.
1. Format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”.
b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file.
c. Drawings in electronic format
- Drawings are required in PDF format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14 or higher format.
d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment.
- Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment.
- Provide indexed PDF bookmarks.
- Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
e. Cover: Identify each volume with title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
List:
- Title of Project
- Identity of separate structure as applicable.
- Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order.
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume.
3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of:
a. Subcontract or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
c. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.
c. Delete reference to inapplicable information.
C. Submittal Data:
1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
D. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation.
3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give:
a. Proper procedures in the event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds.
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products:
a. Catalog number, size, and composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.
d. Certification as to asbestos free
2. Instructions for care and maintenance:
a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Applicable standards
b. Chemical composition
c. Details of installation
2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications.
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication required:
a. List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each contractor's coordination drawings.
a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams.
10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.
11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panel boards:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-6 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents thirty (30) calendar days after approved submittals.
B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase of the Project.
C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance.
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems:
1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel.
B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction:
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-7 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing:
1. Method of Instruction.
2. Equipment and Systems Operated.
3. Length of Instruction Period.
D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing.
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 23***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall:
A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
C. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials.
2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout."
3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40.
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements relating to warranties and bonds.
B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents.
B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner. Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work. Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any.
1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner, an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during non-normal working hours.
2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize the existing warranty.
3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility.
4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours, the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor.
5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions are
done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future
warranty claims.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the name of the Contractor.
B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references.
C. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Item description.
3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat)
4. Warranty Provider. Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer?
5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number.
6. Scope.
7. Duration.
a. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract
b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
8. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment.
B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period.
***END OF SECTION 01 78 36***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions.
6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
7. Field Test records
8. Construction photographs
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s Representative and the Architect.
1.3 RECORDING
A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters.
B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Drawings
As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional,
or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner.
The day-to-day construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following areas of construction:
1. Architectural:
a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code
b. Wall, door, window locations
c. Built in casework locations
d. New rated door and wall schedules/ locations
e. Material and products where submittals are requested
2. Civil and Structural
a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical
b. Materials and products where submittals are requested
c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems
d. Site related elements including:
- Building outlines, entranceways, areaways, roof overhangs, downspouts, significant architectural projections and other pertinent data.
e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction.
f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems
g. Geotechnical subsurface information
h. Items that will require future maintenance
i. Life safety critical items
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection)
a. Products where submittals are requested
b. Final locations of all equipment.
c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork.
d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork.
e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and actuators.
f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance dampers and fire dampers.
g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations.
h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage.
4. Electrical
a. Products where submittals were requested.
b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type.
c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access Control/Security systems.
d. Final locations of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies.
e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions.
5. Environmental
a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure.
D. Specifications and Addenda
Legibly mark each section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. Title and number of each record document
5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate
6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 39***
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
1. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and
reinstall where indicated.
2. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently
removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or
removed and reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control
and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's other tenants' on-site operations are
uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to
start of demolition.
D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings.
1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide
photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage
operations.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4
3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations
of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5
5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor
Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 6
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 1
SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
3. Plywood panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal
size in least dimension.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 2
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 3
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any
time during the test.
1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
C. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Plywood panels.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species.
B. Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade of any of the following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
3. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB.
4. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 4
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
E. For furring strips for installing plywood paneling, select boards with no knots capable of
producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.6 PLYWOOD PANELS
A. Plywood Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire-retardant treated, in thickness
indicated or, if not indicated, not less than ¾-inch nominal thickness.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.
C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C1002 or ASTM C954, length as recommended
by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193, or ICC-
ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 5
1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F593 and
ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and
similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C. Install plywood panels by fastening to studs or framing.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
H. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
I. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 6
J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILERS
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD FURRING
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 24
inches o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16
inches o.c.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous
rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 06 10 53
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 1
SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad
architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims,
and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other
construction before cabinet installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded
cabinets.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Show large-scale details.
3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate
architectural cabinets.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 2
1. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish
required.
a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to
one edge.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar
to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service
performance.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage
architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation
areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field
Conditions" Article.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until wet-work is complete and
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned
for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field
measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork
Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced
quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those
of the referenced quality standard.
B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as
required by quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Wilsonart.
2. Pattern/Color: Match Architect's samples.
F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
3. Edges: Grade HGS.
4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,
Grade VGS; Matte white.
a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching
laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws
from interior of body.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 4
1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints.
J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Architect's samples.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-
metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at manufacturer's shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for
shipment.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 5
C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical
work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams
to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less
than 72 hours.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard
grade of item to be installed.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in
the shop.
C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
wafer-head cabinet installation screws.
D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of ⅛ inch in 96 inches using
concealed shims.
1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as
indicated.
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1½-inch penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips, or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws
through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 6
END OF SECTION 06 41 16
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 7
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 1
SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetration firestopping systems for the following applications:
a. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
b. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated
construction and at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.
2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-
emitting materials.
C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of
firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified
testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping
system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration
firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment
or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having
jurisdiction prior to submittal.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 2
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Approval according to
FM Approval 4991, "Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL
and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
penetration firestopping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article.
Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 3
a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified
testing agency.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) FM Approval in its "Approval Guide."
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and
other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration
firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
c. Grabber Construction Products.
d. Hilti, Inc.
e. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
f. RectorSeal.
g. Specified Technologies, Inc.
h. Tremco, Inc.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings
determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings
determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less
than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.
1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 4
E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting
agency for conditions indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.
2. Substrate primers.
3. Collars.
4. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete
floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one
end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent
elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents
or inorganic fibers.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil
on one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled
with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant
additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect
pillows/bags from being easily removed.
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 5
2.4 MIXING
A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application,
comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate
proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer
speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce
products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings
immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials
that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's
recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage
and migration onto exposed surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 6
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of
firestopping.
C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and
penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with
the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less
than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.
1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of
wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out
and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials
to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 07 84 13
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.
3. Butyl joint sealants.
4. Latex joint sealants.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated
construction.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. For sealants and sealant primers used inside the
weatherproofing system, include printed statement of VOC content.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in ½-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing
system shall comply with the following:
1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250
g/L or less.
3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775
g/L or less.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT (ES-1): Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50
percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc;
SCS2000 SilPruf.
c. Pecora Corporation; PCS.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3
2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT (ES-2): Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag,
plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use,
neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T
and NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
2.4 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants (RS-1): ASTM C 1311.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300.
b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158.
2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Latex (LS-1): Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,
primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer
based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the
preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application
indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Stucco.
d. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants
immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application 01: Exterior joints between aluminum storefront and window framing
members.
1. Joint Sealant: ES-1 (Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT).
B. Joint-Sealant Application 02: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Perimeter joints between wall finish materials and frames of windows and
storefronts.
b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: ES-2 (Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT).
C. Joint-Sealant Application 03: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces not subject to significant movement.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows.
b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: LS-1 (Acrylic latex).
D. Joint-Sealant Application 04: Concealed mastics.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Aluminum thresholds.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7
b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: RS-1 (Butyl-rubber based).
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 8
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 1
SECTION 09 01 90.52 - MAINTENANCE REPAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes maintenance repainting as follows:
1. Cleaning, repair, patching, and preparation of existing substrates.
2. Repainting.
3. Electrostatic applied coating to existing metal substrates.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting," for paint materials and systems for new
construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following MPI gloss levels are defined in accordance with ASTM D 523.
1. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees.
2. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.
3. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.
4. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees.
5. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees.
6. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees.
7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees.
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Perform maintenance repainting in the following sequence, which includes work specified in
this and other Sections:
1. Dismantle existing surface-mounted objects and hardware except items indicated to
remain in place. Tag items with location identification and protect.
2. Verify that temporary protections have been installed.
3. Examine condition of surfaces to be painted.
4. Perform repairs required to achieve smooth, sound surface ready to receive paint.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 2
5. Remove existing paint to the degree required for each substrate and surface condition of
existing paint.
6. Apply paint system.
7. Reinstall dismantled surface-mounted objects and hardware unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include recommendations for product application and use.
2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each pattern, color, and gloss; in sizes indicated
below.
1. Include a list of materials for each coat of each Sample.
2. Label each Sample for location and application.
3. Sample Size:
a. Painted Surfaces: 4-by-8-inch Samples for each color and material, on hardboard.
C. Product List: For each paint product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each MPI-product category
specified in paint systems, with the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Color Matching: Custom computer-match paint colors to match Architect's samples.
B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of maintenance repainting processes for each type of coating
system and substrate indicated and each color and finish required to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Duplicate appearance of
approved Sample submittals.
1. Locate mockups on existing surfaces where directed by Architect.
2. Surface-Preparation Mockups: On existing surfaces using applicable specified methods
of cleaning and other surface preparation, provide mockup sample of at least 100 sq. ft.
3. Coating Mockups: One surface of at least 100 sq. ft. to represent surfaces and conditions
for application of each type of coating system under same conditions as the completed
Work.
4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 3
5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste daily.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PREPARATORY CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Water: Potable.
B. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium pyrophosphate (TSPP),
½ cup of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium
hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts of warm water for every 5 gal. of solution required.
C. Mildewcide: Commercial proprietary mildewcide or a job-mixed solution prepared by mixing
⅓ cup of household detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart of 5 percent sodium
hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts of warm water.
D. Abrasives for Ferrous Metal, Floor Paint, and Concrete Floor Cleaning: Aluminum oxide paper,
emery paper, fine steel wool, steel scrapers, and steel-wire brushes of various sizes.
E. Rust Remover: Manufacturer's standard phosphoric acid-based gel formulation, also called
"naval jelly," for removing corrosion from iron and steel.
2.2 PAINT REMOVERS
A. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, water-
rinsible, solvent-type paste, gel, or foamed emulsion formulation for removing paint from
masonry, stone, wood, plaster, or metal as required to suit Project; and containing no methanol
or methylene chloride.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 4
a. ABR Products, Inc.; ABR Citrus Paint Removers or Super Bio Strip Gel.
b. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; S-301, S-303, or S-305.
c. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 7 without paper covering, Smart Strip, or
Smart Strip Pro.
d. EaCo Chem, Inc.; InStrip.
e. PROSOCO, Inc.; Enviro Klean SafStrip or Enviro Klean SafStrip 8.
2.3 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: For interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC
limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 100 g/L.
5. Two-part Epoxy Floor Coatings: 250g/L.
D. Colors: Match Architect's samples.
E. Transition Coat: Paint manufacturer's recommended coating for use where a residual existing
coating is incompatible with the paint system.
2.4 PAINT MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated
in Interior Maintenance Repainting Schedule at the end of Part 3, or comparable product by one
of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. PPG Architectural Coatings.
3. Pratt & Lambert.
4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 5
2.5 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. Metal-Patching Compound: Two-part, polyester-resin, metal-patching compound; knife-grade
formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of metal repair indicated,
tooling time required for the detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be produced
for filling metal that has deteriorated from corrosion. Filler shall be capable of filling deep
holes and spreading to feather edge.
B. Gypsum-Plaster Patching Compound: Finish coat plaster and bonding compound according to
ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Gypsum Board Patching Compound: Setting-type joint taping compound according to ASTM C
475; paper tape where required.
D. Cementitious Patching Compounds: Cementitious patching compounds and repair materials
specifically manufactured for filling cementitious substrates and for sanding or tooling prior to
repainting; formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of cementitious
substrate indicated, exposure to weather and traffic, the detail of work, and site conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces
against damage from exposure to its products.
3.2 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING, GENERAL
A. Maintenance Repainting Appearance Standard: Completed work is to have a uniform
appearance as viewed by Architect from building interior at 5 feet away from painted surface.
B. Execution of the Work: In repainting surfaces, disturb them as minimally as possible and as
follows:
1. Remove failed coatings and corrosion and repaint.
2. Verify that substrate surface conditions are suitable for repainting.
3. Allow other trades to repair items in place before repainting.
4. Repaint with sufficient coats to produce uniform appearance.
C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all
surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without
streaking or damaging surfaces.
D. Perform additional general cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small areas
that are noticeably different when viewed according to the "Maintenance Repainting
Appearance Standard" Paragraph, so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding
areas.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 6
E. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use gentle methods,
such as scraping and lightly hand sanding, that will not abrade softer substrates, reducing clarity
of detail.
F. Heat Processes: Do not use torches, heat guns, or heat plates.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of painting work.
Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for inspection.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: Do not begin application of coatings unless
moisture content of exposed surface is below the maximum value recommended in writing by
paint manufacturer and not greater than the following maximum values when measured with an
electronic moisture meter appropriate to the substrate material:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
3. Gypsum Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Alkalinity: Do not begin application of coatings unless surface alkalinity is within range
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. Conduct alkali testing with litmus paper on
exposed plaster, cementitious, and masonry surfaces.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
1. If existing surfaces cannot be prepared to an acceptable condition for proper finishing by
using specified surface-preparation methods, notify Architect in writing.
E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.4 PREPARATORY CLEANING
A. General: Use the gentlest, appropriate method necessary to clean surfaces in preparation for
painting. Clean all surfaces, corners, contours, and interstices.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 7
B. Detergent Hand Cleaning: Wash surfaces by hand using clean rags, sponges, and bristle
brushes. Scrub surface with detergent solution and bristle brush until soil is thoroughly
dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from joints and
crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that
surface remains wet. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges.
C. Solvent Cleaning: Use solvent cleaning to remove oil, grease, smoke, and other contaminants
from painted or unpainted surfaces before other preparation work. Wipe surfaces with solvent
using clean rags and sponges. If necessary, spot-solvent cleaning may be employed just prior to
commencement of paint application, provided enough time is allowed for complete
evaporation. Use clean solvent and clean rags for the final wash to ensure that all foreign
materials have been removed. Do not use solvents, including primer thinner and turpentine, that
leave residue.
D. Mildew: Clean off existing mildew by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent
solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or
sponges.
E. Chemical Rust Removal:
1. Remove loose rust scale with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning.
2. Apply rust remover with brushes or as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
3. Allow rust remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by
manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing. Do not allow extended dwell
time.
4. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags, or clean with
method recommended in writing by manufacturer to remove residue.
5. Dry immediately with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal.
6. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until primed.
F. Mechanical Rust Removal:
1. Remove rust with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning. Clean to bright metal.
2. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags.
3. Dry immediately with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal.
4. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until primed.
3.5 PAINT REMOVAL
A. General: Remove paint where indicated. Where cleaning methods have been attempted and
further removal of the paint is required because of incompatible or unsatisfactory surfaces for
repainting, remove paint to extent required by conditions.
1. Application: Apply paint removers according to paint-remover manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not allow paint removers to remain on surface for periods longer than
those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Apply materials to all surfaces, corners, contours, and interstices, to provide a
uniform final appearance without streaks.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 8
b. After work is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and
adhesive marks.
2. Brushes: Use brushes that are resistant to chemicals being used.
a. Metal Substrates: If using wire brushes on metal, use brushes of same metal
composition as metal being treated.
B. Paint Removal with Hand Tools: Remove paint manually using hand-held scrapers, wire
brushes, sandpaper, and metallic wool as appropriate for the substrate material.
C. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paste Paint Remover:
1. Remove loose and peeling paint using water, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of
these. Let surface dry thoroughly.
2. Apply paint remover to dry, painted surface with brushes.
3. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by
manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing.
4. Remove chemicals and paint residue by the following methods, as recommended in
writing by paint remover manufacturer:
a. Rinse with cold or hot water applied by low or medium-pressure spray.
b. Use mechanical removal methods.
5. Repeat process if necessary to remove all paint.
3.6 SUBSTRATE REPAIR
A. General: Repair substrate surface defects that are inconsistent with the surface appearance of
adjacent materials and finishes.
B. Cementitious Material Substrate:
1. General: Repair defects including dents and chips more than ¼ inch in size and all holes
and cracks by filling with cementitious patching compound and sanding smooth.
Remove protruding fasteners.
2. Concrete, Cement Plaster, and Other Cementitious Products: Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. If surfaces are too alkaline to paint,
correct this condition before painting.
3. Existing Coatings: Remove surface irregularities by scraping or sanding to produce
uniform substrate for coating application; sand or mechanically abrade coating to remove
gloss and provide for adhesion of primer; apply one coat primer of type recommended by
coating manufacturer for maximum coating adhesion.
C. Gypsum-Plaster and Gypsum-Board Substrates:
1. Repair defects including dents and chips more than ⅛ inch in size and all holes and
cracks by filling with gypsum-plaster patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove
protruding fasteners.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 9
2. Rout out surface cracks to remove loose, unsound material; fill with patching compound
and sand smooth.
D. Metal Substrate:
1. Preparation: Treat repair locations by wire-brushing and solvent cleaning. Use chemical
or mechanical rust removal method to clean off rust.
2. Defects in Metal Surfaces: Repair non-load-bearing defects in existing metal surfaces,
including dents and gouges more than 1/16 inch deep or ½ inch across and all holes and
cracks by filling with metal-patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove burrs and
protruding fasteners.
3. Priming: Prime iron and steel surfaces immediately after repair to prevent flash rusting.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats to surfaces
that are inaccessible after completion of the Work.
3.7 PAINT APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for application methods unless otherwise
indicated in this Section.
B. Prepare surfaces to be painted according to the Surface-Preparation Schedule and with
manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition.
C. Apply a transition coat over incompatible existing coatings.
D. Metal Substrate: Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges before applying
full coat. Apply two coats to surfaces that are inaccessible after completion of the Work. Tint
stripe coat different than the main coating and apply with brush.
E. Blending Painted Surfaces: When painting new substrates patched into existing surfaces or
touching up missing or damaged finishes, apply coating system specified for the specific
substrate. Apply final finish coat over entire surface from edge to edge and corner to corner.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 10
3.9 SURFACE-PREPARATION SCHEDULE
A. General: Before painting, prepare surfaces for painting according to applicable requirements
specified in this schedule.
1. Examine surfaces to evaluate each surface condition according to paragraphs below.
2. Where existing degree of soiling prevents examination, preclean surface and allow it to
dry before making an evaluation.
3. Repair substrate defects according to "Substrate Repair" Article.
B. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 0 Degree of Surface Degradation:
1. Surface Condition: Existing paint film in good condition and tightly adhered.
2. Paint Removal: Not required.
3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where
needed. Roughen or degloss cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion according to paint
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 1 Degree of Surface Degradation:
1. Surface Condition: Paint film cracked or broken but adhered.
2. Paint Removal: Scrape by hand-tool cleaning methods to remove loose paint until only
tightly adhered paint remains.
3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use other cleaning methods
for small areas of bare substrate if required. Roughen, degloss, and sand the cleaned
surfaces to ensure paint adhesion and a smooth finish according to paint manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 2 Degree of Surface Degradation:
1. Surface Condition: Paint film loose, flaking, or peeling.
2. Paint Removal: Remove loose, flaking, or peeling paint film by hand-tool or chemical
paint-removal methods.
3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where
needed. Use other cleaning methods for small areas of bare substrate if required. Sand
surfaces to smooth remaining paint film edges. Prepare bare cleaned surface to be painted
according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for substrate construction materials.
3.10 INTERIOR MAINTENANCE REPAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Ferrous Metal Substrates (excluding radiator covers and laboratory casework):
1. Latex System: MPI RIN 5.1N system over a transition coat.
a. Prime Coat Conditions:
1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required.
2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat.
3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 11
b. Prime Coat: Primer, Metal, Surface Tolerant, MPI #23.
1) Benjamin Moore; Coronado Rust Scat Metal Primer.
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semigloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
1) Benjamin Moore; Natura Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss.
B. Metal Substrates (laboratory casework):
1. Alkyd Enamel, Water Based
a. Prime coat: Waterborne Bonding Primer.
1) Benjamin Moore; STIX Waterborne Bonding Primer SXA-110.
b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High Gloss Waterborne Interior Alkyd, MPI #157.
1) Benjamin Moore; Advance Waterborne Interior/Exterior Alkyd High Gloss
N794.
C. Metal Substrates (radiator covers in offices):
1. Electrostatic Alkyd Enamel System.
a. Prime Coat Conditions:
1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required.
2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat.
3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer.
b. Prime Coat: Primer, Metal, Surface Tolerant, MPI #79.
1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech V140 Alkyd Metal Primer.
c. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd Enamel matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Alkyd Enamel, interior, semigloss (Gloss Level 5).
1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech V260 Electrostatic Semi-gloss Enamel.
D. Gypsum Board and Plaster:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System over Waterborne Primer: MPI RIN 9.2M:
a. Prime Coat Conditions:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 12
1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required.
2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat.
3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer.
b. Prime Coat: Primer, Stain Blocking, Water Based, MPI #137.
1) Benjamin Moore; Sure Seal Latex Primer Sealer.
c. Topcoat, Ceilings and Soffits: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC flat
(Gloss Level 1), MPI #143.
1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Flat Finish.
d. Topcoat, Walls: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (Gloss Level 2), MPI
#144.
1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low-Sheen Finish.
E. Cementitious Floor and Previously Painted Cementitious Floor:
1. Industrial High Performance Coatings
a. Prime Coat: 100% solids epoxy pre-primer
1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech V155 Epoxy Pre-Primer.
b. Topcoat, Floors and Integral Base: Waterborne epoxy, gloss finish.
1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech V440 Waterborne Amine Adduct Epoxy.
c. Anti-slip additive: Broadcast into wet-film and back-rolled.
1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech Anti-Slip Aggregate V630.
END OF SECTION 09 01 90.52
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 13
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.
2. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and tracks or embossed steel studs and
tracks.
1. Steel Studs and Tracks:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2) MBA Building Supplies.
3) MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
4) Phillips Manufacturing Co.
5) Steel Network, Inc. (The).
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2
6) Telling Industries.
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.
c. Depth: 3⅝ inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations
to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally equivalent to conventional
ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
3) MarinoWARE.
4) MBA Building Supplies.
5) Phillips Manufacturing Co.
6) Steel Network, Inc. (The).
7) Telling Industries.
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0190 inch.
c. Depth: 3⅝ inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch-deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track
sized to friction-fit over inner track.
2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Products: provide one of the following:
1) Blazeframe Industries; Bare Slotted Track (BST/BST 2).
2) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; CST Slotted Deflection
Track.
3) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.
4) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track.
5) Metal-Lite; The System.
6) Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD.
7) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.
2. Depth: ⅞ inch.
F. Resilient Furring Channels: ½-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC58 or AC308 as appropriate for the
substrate.
a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure.
b. Type: Adhesive anchor.
c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply
with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
C. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension.
c. United States Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4
B. Isolation Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, ⅛ inch thick, in width to suit steel face width.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely
fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install continuous isolation foam gasket between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports
or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at
suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 5
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum ½-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
F. Resilient Furring:
1. Install horizontally to walls with attachment leg down and open leg up.
2. Apply continuous foam gasket to contact surface of resilient channels.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than ⅛
inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within ⅛ inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 09 22 16
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in gypsum board
construction.
2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. American Gypsum.
2. CertainTeed Corporation.
3. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
4. National Gypsum Company.
5. USG Corporation
B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: ½ inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
3. Application: Where indicated on Drawings.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: ⅝ inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
3. Application: All locations except where ½-inch is indicated on Drawings.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. Expansion (control) joint.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape: Paper.
C. Joint Compound: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds
applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from rock wool.
D. Acoustical Sealant: Comply with Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
¼- to ⅜-inch-wide joints to install acoustical sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments. Provide ¼- to ½-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim
where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces
with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Acoustical Treatment: At all partitions, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints,
and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical
sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing
off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above
acoustical ceilings.
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Type X: Vertical and horizontal surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated or sound-rated
assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as
not intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior
Painting."
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 18 - 1
SECTION 22 05 18 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes escutcheons.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and
spring-clip fasteners.
C. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and
setscrew.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping
and with OD that completely covers opening.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated
finish.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 18 - 2
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type
with concealed hinge.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION 22 05 18
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 1
SECTION 22 05 23.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes bronze ball valves.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve.
1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends.
3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.
2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.
4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.
D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with
copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
G. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.
H. Valves in Insulated Piping:
1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.
2. Extended operating handles of non-thermal-conductive material and protective sleeves
that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation.
3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.
2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. NIBCO INC.
c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 3
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110.
b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
c. Body Design: Two-piece.
d. Body Material: Bronze.
e. Ends: Soldered or threaded.
f. Seats: RTFE.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.
i. Port: Full.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 4
3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP
ratings may be substituted.
B. Select valves with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered ends.
3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Two-piece, bronze ball valve with stainless-steel trim.
END OF SECTION 22 05 23.12
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 1
SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Fastener systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 2
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
B. Copper Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel or
stainless steel.
2.2 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless-steel anchors, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 3
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
G. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 4
3.3 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.
F. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non-
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary
pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
9. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
10. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 5
H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
8. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
9. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 6
M. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 22 05 29
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1
SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe labels.
2. Valve tags.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Valve numbering scheme.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE LABELS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc.
2. Brady Corporation.
3. Craftmark Pipe Markers.
4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.
5. Marking Services Inc.
6. Seton Identification Products.
B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 2
E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate
both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.
2.2 VALVE TAGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc.
2. Brady Corporation.
3. Craftmark Pipe Markers.
4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.
5. Marking Services Inc.
6. Seton Identification Products.
B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-
inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: 1-1/2-inch-diameter, brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having
predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including
dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 3
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with
painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.
2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings
in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and
plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
D. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including
pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
E. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Domestic Water Piping
a. Background: Safety green.
b. Letter Colors: White.
2. Sanitary Waste Piping:
a. Background Color: Safety purple.
b. Letter Color: White.
3. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-blue
background.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 4
3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose
connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged
valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.
b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.
c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 1-1/2 inches, round.
2. Valve-Tag Colors:
a. For each piping system, use the same lettering and background coloring system on
valve tags as used in the piping system labels and background.
ED OF SECTION 22 05 53
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 1
SECTION 22 07 19 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1. Domestic cold-water piping.
2. Domestic hot-water piping.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates
of tests and test methods employed.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 2
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" and "Indoor Piping
Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville.
b. Knauf.
2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-
applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 3
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1. Available Manufacturers: Ramco.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
1. Available Manufacturers: Ramco.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
1. Available Manufacturers: Ramco.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.
c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.
c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 4
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b. Knauf Insulation.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.
c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
5. Color: White or gray.
6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: White.
6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 5
1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2.7 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division.
b. Compac Corporation.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc.; an American Biltrite company.
d. Knauf Insulation.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;
suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Compac Corporation.
b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc.; an American Biltrite company.
c. Venture Tape.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.
4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 500 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
2.8 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
b. RPR Products, Inc.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2
inch wide with wing seal.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 6
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
1. Available Manufacturer: C & F Wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 7
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 8
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for
firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve
stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 9
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, install fitted PVC cover over
elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps.
Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 10
3.7 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint
system identified below and as specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Cold Water:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Water:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 22 07 19
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 1
SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging
to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption
of water service.
2. Do not interrupt water service without Construction Manager's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 2
B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic
piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
B. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
D. Copper Unions:
1. MSS SP-123.
2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.
3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.
4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.
2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic
and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.
2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Matco-Norca.
b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
c. Wilkins.
d. Zurn Industries, LLC.
2. Standard: ASSE 1079.
3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 3
4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Elster Perfection Corporation.
b. Grinnell Mechanical Products.
c. Matco-Norca.
d. Precision Plumbing Products.
e. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic
water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
C. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.
D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
E. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Prohibited Fittings: Screw or sand bushings; 90-degree or 45-degree street elbows, close
nipples, long screws, bullhead tees, and special fittings, unless approved by the local inspecting
agency.
I. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 4
3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube.
Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
E. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of
both piping systems.
3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in
Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 5
D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect
to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than that required by plumbing code.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and
installation in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Piping Inspections:
a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing
or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 6
c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests
or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Piping Tests:
a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered
or concealed before it was tested.
d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source
and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
2. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
3. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 7
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-
sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller.
END OF SECTION 22 11 16
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 1
SECTION 22 15 13 - GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes piping and related specialties for general-service compressed-air systems, as
follows:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Joining materials.
3. Valves.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Specialties.
6. Quick couplings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Dielectric fittings.
2. Safety valves.
3. Pressure regulators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics.
4. Quick couplings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Brazing certificates.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or with AWS B2.2, "Standard for
Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Compressed-Air Service: Do not interrupt compressed-air service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary compressed-air service according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed
interruption of compressed-air service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of compressed-air service without Construction
Manager's and Owner's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. ASME Compliance:
1. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," for low-pressure, compressed-air piping.
2. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low-pressure, compressed-air
piping.
2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K or L seamless, drawn-temper, water tube.
1. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73,
wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints.
2. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150 or 300.
3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123.
B. Transition Couplings for Metal Piping: Metal coupling or other manufactured fitting same size
as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux in accordance
with ASTM B813.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 3
2.4 VALVES
A. Ball Valves: Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing
Piping."
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
b. Jomar Valve.
c. Matco-Norca.
d. Viega LLC.
e. WATTS.
f. Wilkins.
2. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.
b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
2.6 SPECIALTIES
A. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels,"
construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of bronze body
with poppet-type safety valve for compressed-air service.
1. Pressure Settings: Higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver
pressure rating.
B. Air-Line Pressure Regulators, Bronze Body: Diaphragm operated, bronze body, direct acting,
spring-loaded manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rated for 200-psig-minimum inlet
pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 QUICK COUPLINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 4
1. Aeroquip Performance Products; Eaton, Hydraulics Sector.
2. Bowes Manufacturing Inc.
3. Parker Hannifin Corp.
4. Tuthill Corporation.
B. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for
quick connection and disconnection of compressed-air hose.
C. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal
and stainless steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts.
1. Socket End: With one-way valve and threaded inlet for connection to piping or threaded
hose fitting.
2. Plug End: Straight-through type with barbed outlet for attaching hose.
D. Valveless Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with stainless steel or nickel-plated-
steel operating parts.
1. Socket End: With O-ring or gasket seal, without valve, and with barbed inlet for attaching
hose.
2. Plug End: With barbed outlet for attaching hose.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Distribution Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Type K or L, copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed or
soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Metal General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements and use valve types specified in "Valve
Applications" Article in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," according to
the following:
1. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Valve types specified for low-pressure compressed air.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, GENERAL
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 5
calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants,
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and
to coordinate with other services occupying that space.
E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.
F. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
G. Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings
same as or higher than system pressure rating unless otherwise indicated.
H. Equipment and Specialty Flanged Connections:
1. Use steel companion flange with gasket for connection to steel pipe.
2. Use cast-copper-alloy companion flange with gasket and brazed or soldered joint for
connection to copper tube. Do not use soldered joints for connection to air compressors
or to equipment or machines producing shock or vibration.
I. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and
drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
K. Install piping free of sags and bends.
L. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
M. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join in accordance with AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe
and Tube" Chapter.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 6
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Join in accordance with ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
E. Flanged Joints: Use asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket suitable for compressed air. Join flanges
with gasket and bolts in accordance with ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.
F. Dissimilar Metal Piping Material Joints: Use dielectric fittings.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for
Plumbing Piping."
3.6 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTIES
A. Install air-line pressure regulators in branch piping to equipment.
B. Install quick couplings at piping terminals for hose connections.
C. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment and machine.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices.
B. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters, to comply with MSS SP-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having
jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.
C. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
D. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS SP-58, locally enforced codes, and
authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.
E. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
1. 100 Ft. or Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
2. Longer Than 100 Ft.: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 7
3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identifying labels and devices for general-service compressed-air piping, valves, and
specialties. Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Piping Leak Tests for Metal Compressed-Air Piping: Test new and modified parts of
existing piping. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry air or
gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than
150 psig. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill
system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.
2. Piping Leak Tests for Aluminum Compressed-Air Piping: Test new piping system and
modified parts of existing piping system. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air
piping system to pressure of 15 psig, hold pressure for 10 minutes. Repeat until reaching
required operating pressure, not to exceed 220 psig. Once desired operating pressure is
met, let stand for one hour.
3. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
4. Inspect pressure regulators for proper operation.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 22 15 13
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 42 16.16 - 1
SECTION 22 42 16.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Utility sinks.
2. Sink faucets.
3. Supply fittings.
4. Waste fittings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for sinks.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UTILITY SINKS
A. Utility Sinks SK-A: Sink by others.
1. Faucet: Type 1.
a. Number Required: One.
b. Mounting: On ledge.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 42 16.16 - 2
2. Supply Fittings:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type valve with inlet
connection matching water-supply piping type and size.
1) Operation: Wheel handle.
2) Risers: NPS 1/2, ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated steel flexible
hose.
3. Waste Fittings:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
b. Trap(s):
1) Size: NPS 1-1/2.
2) Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with
17-gauge brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.
4. Mounting: On counter with sealant.
5. Accessories: Rinsing basket.
2.2 SINK FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Sink Faucets Type 1: Manual type, two handle-control mixing valve.
1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets.
a. Product: Provide product indicated on Drawings.
2. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.
3. Body Type: Single hole.
4. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.
5. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
6. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm.
7. Handles: 4-inch wrist blade.
8. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed.
9. Spout Type: Rigid, gooseneck.
10. Spout Outlet: Aerator.
2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 42 16.16 - 3
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply
piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.
D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type valve with inlet connection
matching supply piping.
E. Operation: Wheel handle.
F. Risers:
1. NPS 3/8
2. ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel flexible hose.
2.4 WASTE FITTINGS
A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece..
C. Trap:
1. Size: NPS 1-1/2.
2. Material: Refer to Section 22 66 00 “Chemical Waste Systems For Laboratory And
Healthcare Facilities.”
2.5 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 42 16.16 - 4
B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.
1. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
B. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with
escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
C. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements
specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.
Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and
controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 22 42 16.16
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 66 00 - 1
SECTION 22 66 00 - CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY AND
HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Single-wall piping.
2. Piping specialties.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Single-Wall Piping Pressure Rating: 5-psig air test pressure.
2.2 SINGLE-WALL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PP Drainage Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F1412, extruded pipe and drainage-pattern fittings
molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions and with fire-retardant additive complying with
ASTM D4101; with fusion- and mechanical-joint ends.
1. Exception: Pipe and fittings made from PP resin without fire-retardant additive may be
used for underground installation.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 66 00 - 2
a. GF Piping Systems: Georg Fischer LLC.
b. IPEX USA LLC.
c. Orion Fittings; A WATTS Brand.
B. Adapters and Transition Fittings: Assemblies with combinations of clamps, couplings, adapters,
and gaskets; compatible with piping and system liquid; made for joining different piping
materials.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Couplings: Assemblies with combinations of clamps, gaskets, sleeves, and threaded or flanged
parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made by piping manufacturer for joining
system piping.
B. Adapters and Transition Fittings: Assemblies with combinations of clamps, couplings, adapters,
gaskets, and threaded or flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made for
joining different piping materials.
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Plastic Dilution Traps:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. GF Piping Systems: Georg Fischer LLC.
b. IPEX USA LLC.
c. Orion Fittings; A WATTS Brand.
2. Material: Corrosion-resistant PP, with removable base.
3. End Connections: Mechanical joint.
4. Small Dilution Jars: 1-pint capacity, with clear base unless colored base is indicated; with
NPS 1-1/2 top inlet and NPS 1-1/2 side outlet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Chemical-Waste Piping Inside the Building:
1. Install piping adjacent to equipment, accessories, and specialties, to allow space for
service and maintenance.
2. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating
may be used unless otherwise indicated.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 66 00 - 3
3. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
4. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
5. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
6. Install piping at indicated slopes.
7. Install piping free of sags and bends.
8. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
9. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
10. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing
Piping."
3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Chemical-Waste Piping Inside the Building:
1. Plastic-Piping Fusion Joints: Make PP drainage-piping joints in accordance with
ASTM F1290.
2. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both
system materials.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Make connections to existing piping, so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with
requirements specified for new Work.
C. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for sewerage piping branch connections. Remove
section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping.
D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Use procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if not prescribed, use
procedures described below:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Clean piping by flushing with potable water.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 66 00 - 4
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B. Chemical-waste piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may
be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground Chemical-Waste Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: PP drainage piping and fusion or mechanical joints.
END OF SECTION 22 66 00
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 1
SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fastener systems.
2. Equipment supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural-steel shapes and plates
for equipment supports.
2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Welding certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 2
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-
steel shapes.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 3
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
C. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
21022OLIN-B01&101BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 4
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
B. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 23 05 29
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1
SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
b. Variable-air-volume systems.
2. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment.
3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of existing HVAC systems and equipment.
4. Procedures for exhaust hoods.
5. HVAC-control system verification.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.
F. AHJ: Authority having jurisdiction.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation
that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit the Contract Documents review report, as specified in Part 3.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 2
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures, as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system
readiness checklists, as specified in "Preparation" Article.
E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in
"Examination" Article.
F. Certified TAB reports.
G. Sample report forms.
H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1. Instrument type and make.
2. Serial number.
3. Application.
4. Dates of use.
5. Dates of calibration.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications, Certified by AABC:
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.
B. TAB Specialists Qualifications, Certified by NEBB or TABB:
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB.
C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."
D. Code and AHJ Compliance: TAB is required to comply with governing codes and requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan 0curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
H. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,
filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
J. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of isolating, throttling,
diverting, or mixing fluid flows.
K. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
M. Examine control dampers for proper installation for their intended function of isolating,
throttling, diverting, or mixing air flows.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 4
N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and
record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:
1. Equipment and systems to be tested.
2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.
3. Instrumentation to be used.
4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.
B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness
for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:
1. Airside:
a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.
c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional.
d. Clean filters are installed.
e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.
f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.
g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
h. Ceilings are installed.
i. Windows and doors are installed.
j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system in accordance with the procedures
contained in any of the following and in this Section:
1. AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance."
2. ASHRAE 111.
3. NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, and equipment casings for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 5
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
3.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC EQUIPMENT
A. Test, adjust, and balance HVAC equipment indicated on Drawings, including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Motors.
2. Fans and ventilators.
3. Terminal units.
4. Lab hoods.
3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' Record drawings duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 6
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates
minimum outdoor-air conditions.
b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If
necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses close to the fan and prior to any
outlets, to obtain total airflow.
c. Where duct conditions are unsuitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil
traverse may be acceptable.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:
a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling
system.
d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.
3. Review Contractor-prepared shop drawings and Record drawings to determine variations
in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect
factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.
4. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for
adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit
performance.
5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-
heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.
3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.
1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.
3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.
4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.
D. Verify final system conditions.
1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within
design. Readjust to design if necessary.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 7
2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.
3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, speed, volts, amps, and static profile.
4. Mark all final settings.
5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.
6. Measure and record all operating data.
7. Record final fan-performance data.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down
the duct from the fan discharge.
2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control.
3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static
pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure
for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses.
4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as
follows:
a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers
require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific
project.
b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum
airflow. Record calibration factor.
c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units.
d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow.
e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum
airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any
deviation from design airflow.
f. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be
maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full
cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure.
5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total
airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan
speed listed by fan manufacturer.
a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates
minimum outdoor-air conditions.
b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust
terminals for maximum and minimum airflow, so that connected total matches fan
selection and simulates actual load in the building.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 8
c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If
necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses close to the fan and prior to any
outlets, to obtain total airflow.
d. Where duct conditions are unsuitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil
traverse may be acceptable.
6. Measure fan static pressures as follows:
a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling
system.
d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.
7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow
and minimum outdoor airflow.
a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets.
b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow.
8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit, and adjust the
system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the
optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls Contractor.
9. Verify final system conditions as follows:
a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are
within design. Readjust to match design if necessary.
b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.
c. Re-measure final fan operating data, speed, volts, amps, and static profile.
d. Mark final settings.
e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.
Measure and record all operating data.
f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Phase and hertz.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.
8. Service factor and frame size.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 9
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove
proper operation.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR EXHAUST HOODS
A. Room Pressure: Measure and record room pressure with respect to atmosphere and adjacent
space with hoods in room initially not operating and then with hoods operating.
B. Makeup Air: Systems supplying source of makeup air to hoods shall be in operation during
testing and balancing of exhaust hoods.
1. Measure and record temperature of makeup air entering hood. If hood makeup air is from
multiple sources having different temperatures, measure and record the airflow and
temperatures of each source and calculate the weighted average temperature.
2. Use simulated smoke to observe supply air-distribution air patterns in vicinity of hoods.
Consult with hood manufacturer and report conditions that have a detrimental effect on
intended capture, containment, and other attributes effecting proper operation.
C. Rooms with Multiple Hoods: Test each hood separately, one at a time, and repeat tests with all
hoods intended to operate simultaneously by design.
D. Laboratory Fume Hoods: Measure and record the following:
1. Pressure drop across hood.
2. Airflow by duct traverse where duct distribution will allow accurate measurement, and
calculate hood average face velocity. If hood is connected to exhaust duct distribution
through an exhaust device with integral airflow measurement, that reading may be used
in lieu of a duct traverse.
3. Face velocity across open hood face and calculate hood airflow.
a. Clearly indicate the direction of flow at each point of measurement.
b. Measure velocity across opening on not less than 6-inch centers. Record velocity at
each measurement, and calculate average velocity.
4. Capture and Containment: Check each hood for proper capture and containment using a
smoke-emitting device. Observe and report performance. Make adjustments to achieve
optimum results.
E. AHJ Tests: Conduct additional tests required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.10 HVAC CONTROLS VERIFICATION
A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:
1. Verify HVAC control system is operating within the design limitations.
2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 10
4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.
5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.
6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.
7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.
8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller:
open, closed, or modulating.
9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended
temperature, humidity, or pressure.
B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and
variations from indicated conditions.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING
SYSTEMS
A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan and
equipment with fan(s).
2. Measure and record flows, temperatures, and pressures of each piece of equipment in
each hydronic system. Compare the values to design or nameplate information, where
information is available.
3. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
4. Check the refrigerant charge.
5. Check the condition of filters.
6. Check the condition of coils.
7. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
8. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
9. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements
taken. Report deficiencies.
B. TAB After Construction: Before performing testing and balancing of renovated existing
systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing
equipment has been cleaned and refurbished in accordance with renovation scope indicated by
Contract Documents. Verify the following:
1. New filters are installed.
2. Coils are clean and fins combed.
3. Drain pans are clean.
4. Fans are clean.
5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are
affected by the renovation work.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 11
1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and
determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment
manufacturer.
3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5
percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or
decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
4. Balance each air outlet.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 10 percent or minus 5
percent. If design value is less than 100 cfm, within 10 cfm.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent. If design value is less than
100 cfm, within 10 cfm.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent. If design value is less
than 10 gpm, within 10 percent.
4. Chilled-Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent. If design value is less than
10 gpm, within 10 percent.
5. Condenser-Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent.
B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified
above.
3.13 PROGRESS REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for system-
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to system-balancing devices, to facilitate
proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC
systems and general construction to allow access for performance-measuring and -balancing
devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures
in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in
systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building
floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.14 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 12
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
Product Data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Heating coil, dry-bulb conditions.
e. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
f. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
g. Variable-frequency controller settings for variable-air-volume systems.
h. Settings for pressure controller(s).
i. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 13
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
E. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and speed.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number, make, and size of belts.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan speed.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
F. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System fan and air-handling-unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 14
f. Duct area in sq. ft.
g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
h. Indicated velocity in fpm.
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.
j. Actual average velocity in fpm.
k. Barometric pressure in psig.
G. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
c. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served.
e. Make.
f. Number from system diagram.
g. Type and model number.
h. Size.
i. Effective area in sq. ft.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Airflow rate in cfm.
b. Air velocity in fpm.
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e. Final airflow rate in cfm.
f. Final velocity in fpm.
g. Space temperature in deg F.
H. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.15 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT
A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of
Owner.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 15
B. Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked.
Rechecking shall be limited to the lesser of either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded
or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in.
C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final
report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements
checked during the final inspection, the TAB shall be considered incomplete and shall be
rejected.
E. If recheck measurements find the number of failed measurements noncompliant with
requirements indicated, proceed as follows:
1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final
report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and
request a second final inspection. All changes shall be tracked to show changes made to
previous report.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may pursue others Contract options to
complete TAB work.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions
are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 1
SECTION 23 09 23 – BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set
of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps.
B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.
C. BACnet-Specific Definitions:
1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A
communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a
network.
2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of
BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to
build the BACnet functional requirements for a device.
3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet
messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP
subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number.
4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for
compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International.
5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that
identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device.
D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a
low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used
interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal.
E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing
on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network
Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 2
F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and
support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system.
G. COV: Changes of value.
H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer
and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated.
I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made
at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote
subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable
of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data.
J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications.
K. E/P: Voltage to pneumatic.
L. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different
communication protocols.
M. HLC: Heavy load conditions.
N. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input
(AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are
continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and
temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally
represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used
interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively.
O. I/P: Current to pneumatic.
P. LAN: Local area network.
Q. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
R. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.
S. MTBF: Mean time between failures.
T. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application
controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for
transmission of global data.
U. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to
another network. No routing information is added to protocol.
V. PDA: Personal digital assistant.
W. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 3
X. POT: Portable operator's terminal.
Y. PUE: Performance usage effectiveness.
Z. RAM: Random access memory.
AA. RF: Radio frequency.
BB. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer.
CC. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database.
DD. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.
EE. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
FF. USB: Universal Serial Bus.
GG. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying
protocol.
HH. VAV: Variable air volume.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each control device, panel,
controller, and accessory furnished indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and
electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation, start-up, calibration,
and maintenance instructions as well as all cable and tubing requirements.
B. Control-System Architecture Diagram: Submit a system architecture one-line diagram
indicating schematic location of all controllers, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways,
etc. The BACS vendor shall indicate address and type for each control unit; as well as indicate
physical media, protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN.
C. Floor Plans: Submit a set of floor plans with all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator
workstations, interface devices, UPSs, etc., located and identified. The BACS vendor shall
indicate all network components (repeaters, routers, etc.); network wiring shall be shown and
identified on the floor plan drawings.
D. Detailed Wiring Diagrams: Include detailed wiring. Indicate all required electrical wiring.
Wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and
safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire
numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate
drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on the system schematic. Clearly differentiate between
portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. All wiring of
related components that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram (e.g., all
wiring diagrams for the components and devices on a particular AHU shall be shown on one
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 4
drawing. The supply fan components and devices should not be shown separate from return fan
components and devices, etc.).
E. Sample Graphics and Trends: Submit draft samples of the actual graphics to be used for the
project.
F. Operation and Maintenance Materials: Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) materials
generally in concert with training. O&M materials shall include the following
1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit,
and accessory.
2. BACS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for all
workstation hardware and software and workstation peripheral.
3. BACS Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software.
4. All information provided during the submittal phase; updated with as-built information.
As-built panel drawings shall also be included as part of the O&M manual process. The
drawings that are located in each panel shall incorporate all the systems controlled from
that particular panel. The drawings shall include the system schematic and detailed panel
wiring diagram. Also included (typically noted on the system schematic diagrams) should
be the specific locations of any remote devices such as remote static pressure sensors,
differential pressure sensors, etc.
5. Each control panel on the project shall include an as-built hard copy of all drawings and
documentation associated with that panel and its field devices. This documentation shall
be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted inside the panel door.
6. The final as-built controls drawings (PDF) shall also be accessible via the web-based
graphics.
G. Software Submittal:
1. Cross-referenced listing of software to be loaded on each operator workstation, server,
gateway, and DDC controller.
2. Description and technical data of all software provided, and cross-referenced to products
in which software will be installed.
3. Operating system software, operator interface and programming software, color graphic
software, DDC controller software, maintenance management software, and third-party
software.
4. Include a flow diagram and an outline of each subroutine that indicates each program
variable name and units of measure.
5. Listing and description of each engineering equation used with reference source.
6. Listing and description of each constant used in engineering equations and a reference
source to prove origin of each constant.
7. Description of operator interface to alphanumeric and graphic programming.
8. Description of each network communication protocol.
9. Description of system database, including all data included in database, database capacity
and limitations to expand database.
10. Description of each application program and device drivers to be generated, including
specific information on data acquisition and control strategies showing their relationship
to system timing, speed, processing burden and system throughout.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 5
11. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence
of operation including schematic diagram.
H. Shop Drawings:
1. General Requirements:
a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Architect, Contractor
and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission.
b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches
information in each title block.
c. Prepare Drawings using CAD.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable.
3. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
4. Plan Drawings indicating the following:
a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork
and piping.
b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with
control products indicated.
c. Each desktop operator workstation, server, gateway, router, DDC controller,
control panel instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve
connecting to DDC controller, if included in Project.
d. Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed
installed condition.
e. Network communication cable and raceway routing.
f. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit, and tubing, coordinated with building
services for review before installation.
5. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following:
a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal
operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and
valve.
b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model
number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number.
c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system.
d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating
labels for all wiring terminals.
e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different
drawings showing same point.
f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits
including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers.
g. Narrative sequence of operation.
h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 6
6. Control panel drawings indicating the following:
a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and
connections.
b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components,
cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates and allocated spare space.
c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend.
d. Unique drawing for each panel.
7. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following:
a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each.
b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system.
c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of
interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or fiber-optic cable
type. Indicate raceway type and size for each.
d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of
operator interface with unique identification for each.
8. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following:
a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements
(volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.
b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line
conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power
supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each.
c. Each product requiring power with requirements
(volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.
d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each.
9. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:
a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O.
b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product.
10. Color graphics indicating the following:
a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided.
b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of
pictures, graphics and data displayed.
c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens.
I. System Description:
1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces
and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other
network devices, and power supplies.
2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing and
events which initiate generation.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 7
3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not
limited to, the following:
a. Loss of power.
b. Loss of network communication signal.
c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints.
d. Operator workstation failure.
e. Server failure.
f. Gateway failure.
g. Network failure
h. Controller failure.
i. Instrument failure.
j. Control damper and valve actuator failure.
4. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner.
5. Description of testing plans and procedures.
6. Description of Owner training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROLLERS
A. General: The control system shall consist of an inter-network of controllers. It is intended to
allow cost-effective application of manufacturers’ standard products while maintaining the
integrity and reliability of the control functions commensurate with their application.
B. Building- and system-level controllers shall be capable of operating independently, in stand-
alone fashion, with no communication to other devices on the network while performing their
monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the
controllers’ memory. All points and functions that make up a functional system (typically that
are shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this stand-
alone functionality.
C. Where control sequences depend on global variables such as outside-air temperature, the
controller shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. Examples of
required functional point groupings are as follows:
1. All points and functions required to control an air handler with all directly associated
supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes the terminals that may be associated with
that air handler. Values that may be received across the network include humidity,
terminal-based reset parameters, and smoke modes.
2. All points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system such as pumps, flow
meters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valves, etc. This excludes the
terminals on that hydronic system. Values that may be received across the network
include outside-air temperature and humidity, emergency power source indication, and
terminal-based reset parameters.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 8
3. All points and functions required to control one terminal system including dampers,
valves, flow meters, temperature and humidity sensors, etc. This does not include the
scheduling period or any outside air that may be necessary for control.
D. Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forcing all
outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure mode requirements defined on the
drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm.
E. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required trending,
when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the
shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either upgrade the memory or
provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate the
stand-alone requirements.
F. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of power loss. Software stored in non-
volatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the central server after an interruption of
power occurs.
G. Controllers used for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal
real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementing time-dependent programs.
Provision shall be made for the routine updating of the controllers’ clocks via a time master.
H. Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and
establish communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a self-
diagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled
equipment to a predetermined failure mode.
I. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the systems it
serves. In the situation where a controller will be required to continuously collect data to be
transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors critical recovery information such as the
presence of emergency power, it may be necessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as
any critical sensors. Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment
(such as when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring
the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value
coming from transfer switch contacts.
2.2 SENSORS
A. General: All sensors and transmitters shall be located in accessible locations that do not require
system shutdown for calibration. Locate all remote transmitters in control panels 5' above
finished floor.
B. Temperature Sensors:
1. Sensor Resolution: When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range
shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4°F (unless noted otherwise).
2. Room Temperature Sensor: These shall be an element contained within a ventilated
cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated base.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 9
a. Sensing element: RTD or thermistor, +/- 0.8°F accuracy at calibration point.
b. Setpoint Adjustment: Provide where indicated. Public spaces shall not have
setpoint adjustment. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication
that shall be scalable via the BACS.
c. Occupancy Override: Provide a button on the room sensor enclosure where
indicated, generally in office spaces that do not have occupancy sensors. Public
spaces shall not have occupancy override. This shall be a momentary contact
closure.
d. Display: Alphanumeric.
e. Sensors shall be provided with communication jack and appropriate cabling for
connection to the BACS.
2.3 CONTROL VALVES
A. General:
1. Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service. Close off
pressures must be determined in concert with the actuators and valves shall be provided
to close off against extreme anticipated conditions. Valves shall be selected such that they
are not, as a practice, “oversized.”
2. Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion
across the range of anticipated conditions. “Split ranging” of heating and cooling valves
controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output from the BACS shall be
provided for all control valves. General guidelines are indicated below. When the
selection criteria indicated below are not met, flow characteristic analyses shall be
submitted to demonstrate reasonable correlation between stroke and flow. Actuator
positioning requirements are as follows for each type, if used:
a. Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0- to 10-V dc.
b. Pilot positioners shall be required as necessary to keep the valve closed under the
maximum differential pressure.
B. Coil Valves, Water:
1. Modulating water valves shall generally be ball valves with an equal percentage
characteristic. Modulating water valves shall typically be sized for 50%-100% of the
typical controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV. The minimum design CV
shall be no less than 1.9.
2. Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zero leakage) against
120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when the control signal is set to "fully
closed."
3. Type: Two-way, V-port ball valve with characterizing disk, 1/4 turn.
4. Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated.
5. Ball & Stem: Stainless steel.
6. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon.
7. Actuator: Electric, one motor only; valves 4 inches and larger shall have single operator.
8. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 10
9. Fail positions shall generally be as follows:
a. Terminal hot-water radiation: fail last.
10. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Belimo
b. Valve Solutions
2.4 ACTUATORS
A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with
sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action
and adequate close off rating as required.
2.5 CERTIFICATION
A. Each airflow control device shall be factory calibrated to the job-specific airflows as detailed on
the plans and specifications using NIST traceable air stations and instrumentation having a
combined accuracy of no more than ±1% of signal over the entire range of measurement.
Electronic airflow control devices shall be further calibrated and their accuracy verified to ±5%
of signal at a minimum of 48 different airflows across the full operating range of the device.
B. Each airflow control device shall be marked with device-specific factory calibration data. At a
minimum, it should include the tag number, serial number, model number, eight-point
characterization information, and quality control inspection numbers. All information shall be
stored by the manufacturer for use with as-built documentation.
2.6 CONTROL PANELS
A. Enclosures:
1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/O modules, power
supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral to the controller or I/O module) and a
spare AC outlet.
2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall be from
the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the
panel.
3. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central panel.
4. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4.
5. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1.
6. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports.
7. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 11
B. Power Supplies:
1. The Contractor shall provide a regulated, protected power supply as required with the
ability to produce at least 33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls
being installed. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5mV. There shall be no overshoot
on turn on or off. Operating temperature shall be -20 to +70ºC
2. The BACS Contractor shall certify, in writing, at the time of shop drawing submittal that
the DDC equipment provided will not cause, as a result of its operation, either directly or
indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building’s electrical power
systems.
3. Class II transformers shall be used.
2.7 CONTROL WIRING
A. General:
1. Unless specifically required otherwise by the BACS equipment manufacturer, all I/O
wiring shall be twisted shielded cable. For communications, the BACS equipment
manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations shall apply.
2. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily
accessible shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression fittings.
3. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or
raceway.
4. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall be installed per
code.
5. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT.
6. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT.
7. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or
AHUs shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of
rings or ties.
8. Wire shall be unspliced from the controller to the sensor or device.
9. Control wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring.
10. For sensors with twisted shielded pair cable, the shield shall be grounded at the panel and
taped back at the sensor.
11. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination.
12. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes,
enclosures, components, and other controls-related work.
B. Responsibilities:
1. The BACS Contractor shall be responsible for the following:
a. All wiring from mechanical and electrical alarms and functions to report these
alarms and functions to the BACS head-end.
b. All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whether
individual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, and
dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating
devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls.
c. All power supply wiring for all BACS components.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 12
2. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the following as they relate to the
BACS:
a. The electrical trade shall provide “lock-out stop” control wiring.
b. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be
automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will
be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures by the electrical trade.
c. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be
automatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective alarm
system (i.e., not in response to motor operation), will be run by the electrical trades
except for the power supply wiring to electric damper motors that is specifically
excluded from the electrical trade work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. This Section defines requirements for configuration and installation of the BACS.
B. Devices (i.e., sensors, meters, instruments, etc.) that are resettable must be installed in a readily
accessible location (e.g., the device must be accessible at floor level without the use of a
ladder). No device shall require shutting down a building system for calibration.
C. Devices that are installed in an exposed location (i.e., not mounted within a cabinet) must be
suitable for such installations (e.g., do not install a device that is intended to be installed in a
cabinet in an exposed location).
3.2 BACS CONFIGURATION
A. Vendors providing controls for Cornell University shall maintain site-wide configuration
documentation. Whenever the BACS is extended, the documentation required in this Section
shall be provided/updated per configuration management requirements to reflect the entire
installation on the campus. Device naming and addressing must conform to Cornell’s specific
conventions as detailed in Cornell Design & Construction Standard 15956. No device will be
connected to a Cornell network until these conventions have been understood and met.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic Corporation
3.3 CONTROL PANELS
A. Control panels and enclosures housing the controllers shall be coordinated to the extent
possible, to share vertical and horizontal wire-ways to facilitate and minimize the cost of home-
runs to terminal equipment.
B. Control panels shall be located in equipment rooms, where practicable, and in locations
maintaining ambient conditions between 50 deg F and 90 deg F and 10% to 85% relative
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 13
humidity. Control panels located in areas where conditions are outside of these ranges shall
have enclosures outfitted with heating or cooling devices to provide the proper environmental
conditions. Hoffman style enclosures with removable back plates and keyed, hinged covers
shall be used. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4 when located in mechanical spaces and
NEMA 1 when located in occupied spaces.
C. Cornell must have quick, direct access to all control panels to maintain building integrity similar
to that provided for fire emergencies without going through user spaces. Field panels shall be
located outside of user areas where practical. If field panels must be located in user areas, they
shall be in areas with easy access. Protection and separation for user activities will be provided.
D. Fabrication:
1. The Contractor shall size the panel such that no more than 80% of the surface of the
enclosure back plate is used.
2. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel.
3. Sufficient wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80%
capacity.
4. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional.
5. All controllers, wiring, and components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall
match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each
panel.
6. Label the power source and circuit number for each panel.
3.4 CONTROLLERS
A. The controllers provided shall meet the performance requirements for throughput, response
time, point capacity, trend log capacity, etc., as stated in this Section and Section 23 09 25. The
controllers shall also be configured and programmed to carry out the sequences of operation
contained in the project documents. While Section 23 09 25 contains several constraints on the
controller system architecture, it is recognized that a variety of configurations may be equally
acceptable. For example, it may be possible to meet the project requirements with a single large
controller or several smaller ones. Therefore, this guideline does not generally prescribe
controllers' system architecture or controllers' detailed characteristics, such as processor speed,
amount of memory, amount of I/O, power supply details, etc.
B. Since these guidelines with respect to controllers are performance oriented, rather than
prescriptive, they will generally refer simply to “controllers” meaning computers capable of
direct digital control. In those cases where distinguishing between controllers with differing
capabilities is needed, the following nomenclature will be used (and is also defined in
Section 23 09 25):
1. Building-level controller: These are controllers that are connected to the campus
backbone network and communicate over Ethernet using BACnet/IP. They will typically
be used to control and monitor one or more large systems or be applied to other building-
wide functions. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Building
Controller (B-BC).
2. System-level controller. These controllers may, or may not, be directly connected to the
campus backbone network. They will typically be dedicated to the control of a single
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 14
large piece of equipment such as an air handler DOAS unit or a lab environment with
fume hoods. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Advanced
Application Controller (B-AAC).
3. Field-level controller. These controllers will be on a lower performance BACnet LAN
such as MS/TP or ARCNET. They will typically be used for control of "unitary" devices
such as VAV boxes, fan-coil units, etc. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements
of a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).
C. Controllers shall be provided with a real-time operating system resident in ROM. It shall
support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow
functional override of control functions. At a minimum, the following shall be provided:
1. Real-time operating system software.
2. Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization (with the exception of field-
level controllers).
3. Controller diagnostic software.
4. DDC software.
5. Alarm processing and buffering software.
6. Energy management software.
7. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software.
8. I/O (physical and virtual) database. Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be
overridden for emergency modes and testing. If the design documentation does not
specifically indicate for which points this is required, control vendor shall request in
writing a list of such points. If this has not been requested, the vendor shall reprogram or
reconfigure the systems as required during testing.
D. Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled, and
expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a
specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability of the end user to
understand and interpret the logic easily.
E. Trending: To support commissioning and building data mining, the BACS shall be capable of
trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at a minimum of 15-
minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability of trending at least five points on
each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data shall be uploaded to a
central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow in the controller. Controller memory
capability, network architecture, and communications bandwidth shall be designed to account
for this trending. The BACS vendor shall provide control trends during start up and prior to
functional performance testing of the systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a
common format such as comma separated text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access,
and portable database format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner-accessible SQL
database.
F. Trend Graphs: Web-based software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended
values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simultaneously. The
BACS vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with
the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. Provide a
trend for every analog control loop that includes the setpoint, process variable, and control
output.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 15
G. Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiple values
in user-defined time intervals. These graphs will typically be used in commissioning to observe
loop responses and system reactions. The BACS vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical
manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager
for required configuration.
H. Web-based Graphics: A web server is to be supplied to supply access to graphic displays, the
following screens shall be provided:
1. Floor Plan Screens:
a. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building. Indicate the
location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens.
Indicate the location of temperature sensors and VAV boxes, chilled beams, etc.,
associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan-coils,
single-zone AHUs, etc.) on the floor plan screens.
b. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol.
Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link
from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens
to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen.
c. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechanical
equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location of each item of
mechanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the
plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic.
d. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building
key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically
indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link the graphic building
key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale
floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic floor
plan screens.
e. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic.
2. System Schematic Screens:
a. Provide graphics for each air-handling system. Indicate OA temperature and
relative humidity, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied,
warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and
cooling system graphics. Link screens for supply and exhaust systems, if they are
not available in a single graphic.
b. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one graphic. System graphics
shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output
values, operator commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall
be schematically correct. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct
locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value.
Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on
all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a pop-up window accessed by
selecting the displayed point with the cursor.
1) Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic
or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked setpoint screen. All
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 16
outputs shall be represented in terms of percent open and include a pop-up
link to the control logic.
c. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled.
d. Provide a graphic for each hydronic system.
e. Provide a graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the
unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoccupied,
warm-up, maximum heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Provide links between the
applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics
representing the parent systems.
f. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports
showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc.
g. Link screens to all schedules and setpoints.
I. Alarm Programming: Alarms shall be “intelligent” based upon the algorithms in this Section.
1. In general, alarm programming related to DDC controlled equipment should reside at the
controller level along with the functional programming for equipment control.
a. Intrinsic alarming associated with AI, AV, BI or BV objects (or any of the other 23
BACnet objects that support intrinsic alarming) shall only be used where the alarm
is valid regardless of the state of the associated equipment or where there is a ready
means for automatically suppressing alarm generation when the associated
equipment is operationally secured.
b. Alarm points shall be separate BACnet objects (e.g., BV or EEO) actuated by
associated alarm programming.
c. Alarm objects shall have descriptive BACnet object names. BACnet alarm object
names shall end in “Alarm”. For detailed information on proper point naming
conventions, see Cornell University Facility Services, Design and Construction
Standards 15956 and Section 23 09 25 "Building Automation and Control System
Communications and Interoperability."
d. If it is necessary for the alarm to have latching functionality, the user shall be
provided easy unlatching capability from within the DDC system if appropriate,
taking into account equipment safety concerns. This is in addition to any local
alarm reset.
e. Alarms designated for monitoring by EMCS shall be set up in the DDC system to
report to the EMCS alarm server.
2. Analog Deviation Alarms: Analog deviation alarms shall be based upon the comparison
between the controlled variable and the controlled variable setpoint (whether calculated
or fixed).
a. When controlled variable deviates from setpoint above or below user adjustable
high or low alarm thresholds, the alarm shall be activated.
b. High and low alarm threshold values shall have associated adjustable deadbands
(hysteresis values) for alarm clearing conditions as the controlled variable falls
below the high alarm threshold or rises above the low alarm threshold.
c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays for active
equipment operation.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 17
d. Alarm programming shall include startup delays to prevent nuisance alarms during
equipment startup.
e. Analog deviation alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is
operationally secured.
3. Analog High Limit Alarms: Analog high limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison
between the controlled variable and a user adjustable high limit alarm value.
a. When controlled variable rises above the user adjustable high limit, the alarm shall
be activated.
b. High alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis value)
for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable falls below the high alarm
limit.
c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays.
d. High limit alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally
secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations.
4. Analog Low Limit Alarms: Analog low limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison
between the controlled variable and a user adjustable low limit alarm value.
a. When controlled variable falls below the user adjustable low limit, the alarm shall
be activated.
b. Low alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis value)
for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable rises above the low alarm
limit.
c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays.
d. Low limit alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally
secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations.
5. Binary Run Status Alarms: Status alarms shall be based upon the comparison between
run status and equipment command where applicable.
a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays.
6. Binary Alarming: Alarms shall be triggered upon associated BI changing state to the non-
normal or alarm state.
a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays.
b. Binary alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally
secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations.
7. Steam Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Temperature Alarming: Steam shell and tube heat
exchangers shall have two temperature alarms associated with them.
a. Operational Supply Temperature Deviation Alarm when heat exchanger is in
operation.
b. High Supply Temperature Alarm that is always enabled whether or not the heat
exchanger is operational or not, so as to monitor for steam control valve leak by.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 18
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. The BACS shall be fully commissioned. All acceptance testing, documentation, and training
shall be required.
B. The BACS contractor’s responsibilities for commissioning and check-out include the following:
1. Provide all logic, graphics, and trends for review prior to the start of field commissioning
activities.
2. Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point and
function contained within the BACS.
3. Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared by the
subcontractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format.
4. Submit log sheets to the Owner prior to the commencement of any final acceptance
testing.
5. Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing
that all components of the BACS system are functioning as per the requirements of the
contract documents.
6. Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four weeks prior to
the commencement of any final BACS acceptance testing.
7. The BACS contractor shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system
is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and software functions verified,
that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the
specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated during
system adjustment shall be specifically noted.
8. The BACS contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from Cornell.
The checkout shall consist of verifying the ability of the BACS to communicate with the
central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/or transmitter, and
verifying the operation of each control point.
9. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to Cornell. Alarm conditions
shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control points shall be exercised through
their entire range. All control interlocks and sequences shall be completely verified. The
checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper
operation of the total system.
3.6 TRAINING
A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives of the
control manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner’s operating personnel who have
responsibility for the mechanical systems and controls installed by the contractor. The amount
of training that is provided shall match the size of the project (e.g., no less than eight hours for
small projects and up to 80 hours for large projects).
B. Contractor shall make available to the Owner regular, scheduled training courses for ongoing
training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and software-
oriented courses as well as energy conservation and management courses.
C. In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two
weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility for four people. This training
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 19
only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products. If a contractor
has provided this training previously (on a previous project or directly with the Owner) then the
additional training does not need to be provided again.
3.7 WARRANTY
A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against
defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of
acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner, and for that
period of time noted in special or extended warranties.
B. The period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of the work first performed
after substantial completion by the period of time between substantial completion and the actual
performance of the work.
END OF SECTION 23 09 23
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 1
SECTION 23 09 25 - BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. The following standards shall govern the design and selection of equipment supplied to fulfill
the requirements of this section:
1. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004: BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Networks, as amended, and hereinafter referred to as
“BACnet,” American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,
Inc. 2004.
2. B. ATA/ANSI 878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network.
B. ISO/IEC 8802-3 (1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier
sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer
specifications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. In addition to the definitions contained in the applicable standards of 1.03, the following should
be noted:
1. ARCNET - Attached Resource Computer Network. See BACnet, Clause 8 and
ATA/ANSI 878.1.
2. BACnet/IP - BACnet Annex J Devices. Annex J of BACnet describes how BACnet
devices can make use of IP directly for communicating across IP-based internets.
3. BACnet PICS - A Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement that describes the
BACnet capabilities of a specific device. See BACnet, Annex A.
4. BACS - Building Automation and Control System.
5. BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device. See BACnet, Annex J.
6. BMA - BACnet Manufacturers Association.
7. BTL - The BACnet Testing Laboratories of the BMA. The organization responsible for
testing products to assure that they conform to the BACnet standard. Listings of tested
products are available at www.bacnetassociation.org.
8. Campus Backbone - A fiber optic data communication infrastructure on the Cornell
campus managed by CIT. Users connect to the backbone by means of CIT-supplied
Ethernet concentrators in each building and appropriate 10/100BASE-T unshielded,
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 2
twisted pair wiring. The backbone uses the Internet Protocol (IP) for routing messages to
and from computers both on and off the Cornell campus.
9. CIT - Cornell Information Technologies. The organization that manages the Cornell
campus networking infrastructure, including the provision of network connections in
Cornell buildings.
10. Computer Section - The computer group within the Cornell Utilities and Energy
Management Department. The Computer Section is responsible for the EMCS and the
coordination of BACS device addressing and network numbering.
11. BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block. A collection of one or more BACnet
services defined for the purpose of describing communication functionality in an
unambiguous way. See BACnet, Annex K.
12. Device Profile - A collection of BIBBs that describes the minimum BACnet capabilities
of a particular device in order to achieve reliable communication in one of five specified
“interoperability areas.” Devices include BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet
Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) and BACnet Application Specific
Controllers (B-ASC). See BACnet, Annex L.
13. EMCS - A computer complex, housed at Chilled Water Plant 1 that provides Energy
Management and Control System functions for the University. The EMCS is connected
to the campus backbone and uses the IP for the routing of messages to and from
individual buildings.
14. Ethernet - A carrier sensing multiple access with collision detection network technology
defined by ISO/IEC 8802-3.
15. Gateway - A device that translates BACnet messages into those of a non-BACnet
protocol and vice-versa.
16. Internetwork - A set of two or more BACnet networks interconnected by routers.
17. Interoperability Area - A communications domain in which functional cooperation is
desired. These areas are currently: 1) data sharing; 2) alarm and event management; 3)
trending; 4) scheduling; and 5) device and network management. See BACnet, Clause 22.
18. IP - The Internet Protocol. A networking protocol originally developed by the federal
Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency. BACnet messages can traverse the campus
backbone by being encapsulated in routable IP packets.
19. Local - Pertaining to the requirements of a specific job or building project.
20. LAN - Local Area Network. One of the approved BACnet network technologies:
Ethernet, ARCNET or MS/TP.
21. MS/TP - Master-Slave/Token-Passing Network. One of the approved BACnet LANs. See
BACnet, Clause 9.
22. Network - One of the communication technologies for data communications specified in
BACnet. Approved network technologies at Cornell are Ethernet, ARCNET and MS/TP.
23. PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A document that describes in
detail a device’s BACnet capabilities. See BACnet, Annex A.
24. UDP - The User Datagram Protocol. One of the IP family of protocols. UDP is used to
convey BACnet/IP messages and is characterized by a “port number” for each protocol.
BACnet/IP typically uses UDP port X'BAC0' or decimal 47808.
25. VLAN - Virtual Local Area Network. A network configuration that allows devices to
communicate across multiple physical local area networks (LANs) using their hardware
or “medium access control” (MAC) addresses as if they shared a common networking
medium. As with a physical LAN, “local” broadcast messages are also propagated to
each of the participating LANs. VLAN capability depends on the configuration of the
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 3
interconnecting data communication equipment. VLAN configuration is performed by
CIT.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. In addition to any requirements specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall provide both proposed
and as-built versions of the following:
1. Schematic drawings that represent the system architecture and configuration, in both
hardcopy and editable electronic format.
2. A points list that includes, for each physical or logical point, the name, description,
display units, alarm limits and definitions, along with the BACnet object description,
object ID, and associated device ID. The list shall also indicate whether Trend Log or
Schedule objects have been established for the point.
3. Documentation for any non-standard BACnet objects, properties, or enumerations
utilized detailing their structure, data types, and any associated lists of enumerated
values.
4. PICS files indicating the BACnet functionality and configuration of each device. In
addition to the requirements of BACnet, Annex A, the Contractor shall provide
information on any limitations on the numbers of supported objects in a given device
including, specifically, Trend Log and Schedule objects.
5. Documentation on submitted products that have been tested and listed by the BACnet
Testing Laboratory (BTL) or a letter on manufacturer’s company letterhead indicating the
anticipated date by which testing is expected to be completed. If, for any reason, BTL
testing and listing has not been completed, a written commitment shall be provided to
upgrade installed controls to a version that meets BTL testing and listing requirements
should deficiencies be found during BTL testing.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination of subcontractors’ work relative to the
BACS. Specific questions relating to communication and interoperability shall be submitted to
the Computer Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Each networked device supplied pursuant to this Section shall be installed and configured so as
to correctly execute all sequences of operation for its intended application, as defined in other
Sections of these Specifications. In addition, each networked device shall provide, at a
minimum, the BACnet communication capabilities prescribed in the device profiles for devices
of its type. See Article 2.2.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 4
2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. This clause prescribes the minimum requirements for devices supplied pursuant to this Section.
1. Controller Requirements: Controller devices supplied to meet the functional and
operational requirements of this specification shall conform, at a minimum, to one the
BACnet device profiles contained in BACnet, Annex L: BACnet Building Controller (B-
BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) or BACnet Application
Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interoperability requirements of such devices are
contained in BACnet, Annex L. B-BC controller devices shall communicate using
BACnet/IP. Other devices may use BACnet over ARCNET or BACnet over MS/TP.
2. Router Requirements: In the event that devices are provided that do not use BACnet/IP
over Ethernet as their communication technology, BACnet routers shall be provided that
route between BACnet/IP over Ethernet and the other BACnet LAN type(s), whether
ARCNET or MS/TP. These routers shall conform to the specifications of BACnet, Clause
6.
3. Gateways: BACS devices that use BACnet as their native protocol are preferred. The use
of gateways, in circumstances where no native BACnet devices are available, requires the
specific approval of the Owner in each instance.
4. Workstation Requirements: The EMCS operator interface is the responsibility of the
Computer Section. If, however, a specific job requires a local workstation, the Contractor
shall provide a personal computer of current design and approved by the Owner equipped
with a Web browser that can display information from a Contractor-supplied Web server
that interfaces with the local BACnet network and the campus backbone, as described for
below-specified web server requirements.
5. Web Server Requirements: If a local workstation is required, the Contractor shall comply
with above-specified workstation requirements and shall, in addition, provide a Web
server computer with the Web page presentation, data acquisition and storage
functionality described in this Section, including the specific functions listed below. The
Web server shall be configured in such a way that there is no software-imposed limit to
the number of simultaneous users.
a. Data Sharing:
1) Presentation of data (i.e., user-definable reports and graphics)
2) The ability to monitor and display the values of all BACnet object types,
including all required and optional properties.
3) The ability to modify set points and parameters.
b. Alarm and Event Management:
1) Operator notification and presentation of event information
2) Alarm acknowledgment by operators
3) Alarm summarization
4) Adjustment of alarm limits
5) Adjustment of alarm routing
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 5
c. Scheduling:
1) Modification of schedules
2) Display of the start and stop times (schedule) of scheduled devices.
d. Trending:
1) Modification of the parameters of a trend log
2) Display and archive of trend log data
e. Device and Network Management:
1) Display of information about the status of any device on the BACnet
internetwork.
2) Display of information about any object on the BACnet internetwork.
3) Ability to silence a device on the network that is transmitting erroneous
data.
4) Ability to cause a remote device to reinitialize itself.
5) Ability to backup and restore the configuration of devices on the local
BACnet network.
6) Ability to query and change the configuration of local BACnet routers.
2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR NETWORK CONNECTIONS
A. This clause prescribes the means of interconnecting BACS devices provided pursuant to this
specification.
1. Local Area Networks (LANs)
a. All control devices meeting the B-BC device profile shall be connected to an ISO
8802-3 (Ethernet) LAN provided by the Contractor. This LAN, in turn, shall be
connected to the campus backbone network. Unless otherwise specified, the
connection shall be via a 10/100BASE-T port provided by the Owner. The location
of the jack will be determined in consultation with the Computer Section, which
will arrange with CIT for the jack's installation. The Contractor shall also provide
any additional data communication hardware, such as hubs and repeaters, which
may be needed to interconnect the supplied BACS equipment and to connect to the
Owner's backbone network.
b. To facilitate maintenance technician access to the LAN, the Contractor shall also
provide at least one additional 10/100BASE-T access point in each mechanical
room that contains BACS equipment. This requirement may be met by supplying
either a hub with a spare port or a dedicated jack.
c. Control devices that meet the B-ASC profile, but do not support Ethernet, must use
another approved BACnet LAN technology. These technologies are ARCNET and
MS/TP. If Ethernet is not supported on any part of the internet-work, a standalone
BACnet router, or a BACnet Building Controller with built-in routing capability,
must be provided for routing between the Ethernet and ARCNET or MS/TP LANs.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. This clause provides specific interoperability and networking requirements that pertain to the
use of BACnet.
3.2 REQUIREMENTS BY INTEROPERABILITY AREA
A. This clause provides requirements pertaining to the five interoperability areas of data sharing,
alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management.
1. Data Sharing: Data Sharing requirements apply to the exchange of information between
BACnet devices for archival storage, generating graphics and reports, the sharing of
common sensor or calculated values, carrying out interlocked control strategies, and the
modification of set points or other operational parameters. All such data to be exchanged
shall be represented as BACnet objects and conveyed using BACnet messages. Only
standard BACnet objects and messages may be used to implement data sharing
requirements unless the non-standard extensions are explicitly approved by the Owner.
Any extensions to BACnet shall be fully documented in the manner used within the
BACnet standard. Submission of such documentation is a prerequisite for obtaining
approval of an extension.
a. Points List: The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with all
points indicated in the BACS points list. The Contractor shall provide any
additional points needed to fully implement the sequence of operations and other
functionality described in this specification.
b. Data Presentation: In the event that workstation/web server capabilities have been
specified, the following characteristics shall apply to graphic displays:
1) The graphic displays shall include schematic diagrams of the systems being
displayed.
2) When a graphic display is being viewed all values displayed shall be
updated when a change of value (COV) notification is received or, if COV
is not implemented, within five seconds.
3) Any data value from any networked device shall be available for plotting at
a workstation in real time. The operator shall be able to select binary and
analog data concurrently and to plot multiple instances of each data type on
the same screen. The operator shall be able to select sampling intervals from
1 second to 60 seconds. For devices that implement COV reporting, the
operator shall be able to select this as the means to update the plot. It shall
be possible to save such real-time plots for subsequent recall.
c. Monitoring of Any Property: The operator shall be able to display any value of any
property of any object from any networked device including all properties required
by BACnet, all supported optional properties, and any proprietary extensions.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 7
d. Global Object Definitions: The control system shall be configured with system-
wide unique BACnet objects as needed to convey all globally significant
information necessary to implement the control strategy.
e. Set-Point and Parameter Modifications: Operators with appropriate authority shall
be able to modify all control loop set points and tuning parameters via BACnet
messages initiated through operator interaction with graphics displays.
f. Peer-to-Peer Data Dependencies: All BACnet devices shall be installed and
configured to exchange data values directly, without the need for operator or
workstation intervention, to implement the sequence of operations specified in the
mechanical system drawings and to share global data values.
2. Alarm and Event Management:
a. Alarm and Event Management is the exchange of data between BACnet devices
related to the occurrence of predefined conditions that meet specific criteria. Such
conditions are called “events” and may be the basis for the initiation of a particular
control action in response or the simple logging of the event’s occurrence. The
event may also be deemed to represent a condition that constitutes an “alarm”
requiring human acknowledgment and intervention.
b. All alarms and events shall be implemented using standard BACnet event
detection and notification mechanisms. Either intrinsic reporting or algorithmic
change reporting may be used but the intrinsic reporting method is preferred. See
BACnet, Clause 13.
c. Alarm Lists:
1) The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured to detect
alarms and events for the points indicated in the system drawings. Software
logic shall be provided to avoid nuisance alarms, e.g., no temperature or
status alarms shall be generated when fan systems are not running or during
start-up and shut-down transitions. It shall be possible to configure a delay
between the occurrence of an alarm condition and its enunciation.
2) Alarms shall appear at the EMCS and any local operator workstation(s)
within five seconds of their occurrence. The workstations shall display an
alarm message window that appears on top of any other open windows. The
alarm message window shall have a distinctive color and appearance to
attract the operator's attention. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be
able to configure the workstation to emit an audible signal (or not) when an
alarm message is received.
3) Alarms that require operator acknowledgement shall cause the alarm
window to remain active until such an acknowledgement is received. If
multiple alarms are received, unacknowledged alarms shall be displayed on
a first come first served basis grouped by priority, with the highest priority
alarms displayed first.
4) Alarms shall be distributed using the BACnet notification class mechanism.
Assignment of classes and destinations shall be configured according to
details provided by the Owner. One destination shall, in all cases, be the
EMCS.
5) BACnet provides a mechanism for prioritizing alarm and event notification
messages using a numerical range of 0-255 with 0 being the highest priority
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 8
and 255 being the lowest priority. The priorities presented in the Table 1 are
consistent with the safety requirements of UL 864 (applies to fire systems)
and UL 1076 (applies to security systems).
6) Alarm and event notification priorities shall be configured in the Priority
Range as indicated in Table 1 below, and shall be conveyed using the
indicated Network Priority. See BACnet, Clause 6.
Table 1. Cornell Alarm and Event Priorities
Message Group Priority
Range
Network Priority Brief Description
Life Safety 00 - 31 Life Safety Message Notifications related to an immediate
threat to life, safety or health such as fire
detection or armed robbery.
Property Safety 32 - 63 Life Safety Message Notifications related as an immediate
threat to property such as forced entry.
Supervisory 64 - 95 Critical Equipment
Message
Notifications related to improper
operation, monitoring failure
(particularly of Life Safety or Property
Safety monitoring), or monetary loss.
Trouble 96 - 127 Critical Equipment
Message
Notifications related to communication
failure (particularly of Life Safety or
Property Safety equipment).
Miscellaneous
Higher Priority
Alarm and Events
128 - 191 Urgent Message Higher-level notifications related to
occupant discomfort, normal operation,
normal monitoring, or return to normal.
Miscellaneous
Lower Priority
Alarm and Events
192 - 255 Normal Message Lower-level notification related to
occupant discomfort, normal operation,
normal monitoring, or return to normal.
d. Alarm Acknowledgement: Alarms shall be acknowledged through the EMCS
alarm acknowledgement process.
e. Alarm Summarization: Alarm summarization shall be handled through the EMCS
alarm summarization process.
f. Alarm Parameter Adjustment: Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to
change alarm parameters for all standard BACnet event types.
g. Alarm Routing Adjustment:
1) Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to change alarm routing
(BACnet notification classes) for each alarm including the destination for
each type of alarm and alarm priority, the day of week and time of day, and
the type of transition involved (TO-OFFNORMAL, TO-NORMAL, etc.).
2) Initially, notification classes shall be configured in a manner that
distinguishes between the EMCS and any local workstation, if provided.
3. Scheduling: Scheduling is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the
establishment and maintenance of dates and time at which specified output actions are to
be taken. All schedules shall be implemented using BACnet objects and messages.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 9
a. Schedule Lists:
1) The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with
start/stop, mode change, and night setback schedules as defined in the
sequence of operations. As part of the installation process, the Contractor
shall configure vacation, holiday, and any special event schedules as
provided by the Owner.
2) The system shall have the ability to program alterations to programmed
operating schedules based on the priority of events and shall include the
following scenario:
a) Based on operator privileges, the operator shall have the ability to
temporarily override the programmed schedule of equipment.
Operational override of a programmed schedule shall be for a specific
duration following which the schedule shall revert back to the
preprogrammed schedule.
b. Display of Start and Stop Times and Actions: An operator shall be able to inspect
the content of any schedule and determine the specific control actions that will
occur at any time, on any date. For any particular device or system parameter that
is the subject of a schedule, an operator shall be able to determine the schedule of
actions related to that particular device or parameter.
c. Modification of Schedules: All calendar entries and schedules shall be modifiable
from the EMCS or local workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege.
4. Trending: Trending is the accumulation of (time, value) data pairs at specified rates for a
specified duration. Trends are distinguished from real-time plotting of data by the fact
that the data are destined for long-term storage.
a. Archival Storage of Data: Archival storage of data will be handled by the EMCS.
However, the Owner may specify local trend archiving and display through the use
of BACnet Trend Log objects.
b. Modification of Trend Log Parameters: An operator with sufficient privilege shall
be able to change the data points to be logged, the sampling rate, and the duration
of a trend log.
5. Device and Network Management: Device and network management is the exchange of
data between BACnet devices concerning the operation and status of specific devices. If
local workstation capabilities are provided, the following functions shall be available:
a. Display of Device Status Information: Operators shall be able to display at any
time the operational status of any device on the BACnet internetwork.
b. Display of BACnet Object Information: Operators shall be able to display, at any
time, any property of any BACnet object. Operators shall be able to display
property values of objects grouped by object type, object location, and building
system.
c. Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data: Operators shall be able to
direct a field device to stop transmitting event, alarm or COV notifications until a
subsequent command to resume transmissions is received.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 10
d. Time Synchronization: Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any
device on the network that supports time-of-day functionality. The operator shall
be able to select to set the time and date for an individual device, or all devices on
a single local network.
e. Remote Device Reinitialization: Operators shall have the ability to issue
reinitialization commands to any device that supports remote reinitialization.
f. Backup and Restore: Operators shall have the ability to backup and restore all
BACnet devices on the network that support this capability.
g. Configuration Management of Half-Routers, Routers and BBMDs: Operators shall
have the ability to display and modify the routing table entries in all supplied
BACnet half-routers and routers and the broadcast distribution and foreign device
registration tables in all BBMDs.
3.3 USE OF BACNET OBJECTS
A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the representation of data and
functionality using BACnet objects.
1. Naming Conventions: The following sections list the requirements for the assignment of
names and identifiers for BACnet objects:
a. Device Names:
1) The EMCS uses a system for naming its control devices based on facility
name, location within a facility, the system or systems that the device
monitors and/or controls, or the area served. Names can be up to 254
characters in length, without embedded spaces. Only the characters A-Z, 0-
9, ".", and "-" may be used. The goal is the shortest descriptive, but
unambiguous, name. For example, if there is only one chilled water pump
"P1", a valid name would be "DUFFIELD.CW.P1.CONTROL".
2) If there are two pumps designated "P1", one in the basement mechanical
room and one in the penthouse mechanical room, the names could be
"CHP.BSMT.CW.P1.CONTROL" or "CHP.PENT.CW.P1.CONTROL". In
the case of unitary controllers, for example a VAV box controller, a name
might be "COURT.122.TV-LOUNGE". These names should be used for the
value of the "Object_Name" property of the BACnet Device objects of the
controllers involved so that the BACnet name and the EMCS name are the
same.
b. Device Instance Numbers:
1) BACnet allows 4194305 device instances per BACnet internetwork, each of
which must be unique. Cornell's unique device instances are formed as
follows: Device Instance = "FFFFNDD" where:
a) FFFF = Facility Code (see below)
b) N = 0-9 This allows up to 10 networks per facility or building.
c) DD = 00-99 This allows up to 100 devices per network.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 11
2) Facility Code assignments are currently:
a) 0000-0999 Open
b) 1000-1999 Statutory Facilities
c) 2000-2999 Endowed Facilities
d) 3000-3999 Housing and Dining Facilities
e) 4000-4999 Off-Campus Facilities
f) 5000-5999 Utilities
3) Some facilities have a facility code with an alphabetic suffix to denote
wings, related structures, etc. The suffix will be ignored. Network numbers
for facility codes above 4193 will be assigned in the range 0000-0999.
4) The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment, or
confirmation, of the Facility Code to be used prior to beginning device
configuration.
c. Non-Device Object Names: Objects other than Device objects shall be named in a
manner analogous to Device objects. The names shall consist of a facility.[sub-
facility.]system.[sub-system.]point designation.
d. Non-Device Object Instance Numbers: The instance numbers for objects other than
Device objects may be assigned at the Contractor’s discretion subject only to the
constraint that they be unique for a given object type within a given device.
2. Commissioning/Diagnostic Mode: In order to support commissioning and
troubleshooting functions, the Out_Of_Service property of all Analog, Binary, Multi-
state, Loop, and Program objects shall be writable using BACnet services.
3. Using Object Descriptions:
a. Each device object and every object in BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) shall
be configured with a Description property. The descriptions used shall be
submitted to the Owner for approval.
b. For all object types in all devices that support Description properties, the available
string length and whether or not the Description is writable using BACnet services
shall be specified in the device’s PICS.
4. Issues Relating to Specific BACnet Object Types: This clause provides requirements that
pertain to the use of specific BACnet object types.
a. Analog Input, Output, and Value: All Analog_Input, Analog_Output, and
Analog_Value objects shall have the capability of using the change of value
(COV) reporting mechanism and the COV_Increment property shall be writable
using BACnet services.
b. Binary Input: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Input
objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list.
Binary Input objects shall support COV reporting.
c. Binary Output: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Output
objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list.
All Binary Output objects associated with motor on/off status shall track changes
of state and runtime. Binary Output objects shall support COV reporting.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 12
d. Binary Value: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Value
objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list.
Binary Value objects shall support COV reporting.
e. Calendar:
1) Devices providing scheduling capability shall also provide at least one
Calendar object with a capacity of at least ten entries. Operators shall be
able to view the calendar object and make modifications from any BACnet
workstation on the network.
2) If the Calendar’s Date_List property is writable using BACnet services, all
calendar entry data types shall be supported.
f. Loop: All control loops using any combination of proportional, integral, and/or
derivative control shall be represented by BACnet Loop objects. Operators with
sufficient authority shall be able to adjust at least the Update_Interval, Setpoint,
Proportional_Constant, Integral_Constant, and Derivative_Constant using BACnet
services. Loop objects shall support COV reporting.
g. Multi-state Input, Output, and Value: The text to be used for the Multi-state object
types shall be determined from the points list. Feedback_Value shall be determined
by sensing the actual condition or mode of the device. All Multi-state objects shall
support COV reporting.
h. Schedule: All building systems with date and time scheduling requirements shall
have schedules represented by BACnet Schedule objects. All operators shall be
able to view the entries for a schedule. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be
able to modify schedule entries from any BACnet workstation. Required schedules
are shown on the drawings as part of the occupied and unoccupied modes.
5. Dynamic Object Creation: BACnet Building Controllers shall be configured to allow the
dynamic creation of Trend Log, Calendar, and Schedule objects by means of the BACnet
Create Object service. This shall be possible from any supplied BACnet workstation by
operators with appropriate authority.
3.4 USE OF BACNET SERVICES
A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet communication
services.
1. Interoperable Commands : All dampers, valves, fans, or other mechanical equipment that
may need to be controlled by more than one application shall be represented as
commandable BACnet objects. The application programs interacting with this equipment
shall be configured to use the command priorities listed in Table 2. If implementing the
sequence of operations or other required functionality requires using a command priority
not listed in Table 2, the priority assignment must be approved by the Owner.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 13
Table 2. Cornell Command Priorities
Priority Level Application Priority Level Application
1 Manual-Life Safety 9 Available
2 Automatic-Life Safety 10 Available
3 Available 11 Load Shedding
4 Available 12 Available
5 Critical Equipment Control 13 Available
6 Minimum On/Off 14 Available
7 Available 15 Available
8 Manual Operator 16 Available
2. Alarming: This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet for
alarm processing.
a. Alarm Priorities: All alarm and event notification priorities shall be configured as
indicated in 3.02.B.1.
b. Notification Classes:
1) The EMCS shall be designated as a recipient for all alarm notifications.
2) The Priority, Ack_Required, and Recipient_List properties of Notification
Class objects shall be writable over the network using BACnet services.
c. Event Notification Message Texts: Alarm and event processing shall be configured
to convey descriptive text messages along with the notification.
3. Operator Authority Levels: If local workstation capability is provided, there shall be at
least three levels of authority:
a. Administrator - All privileges
b. Control Shop - All programming and configuration
c. Building Coordinator - Read only
4. Change of Value Processing:
a. All local workstations shall be able to display property values based on the receipt
of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of Value notifications. Operators shall have
the ability from any workstation to subscribe to COV notifications for all objects
that support COV subscriptions.
b. After initialization, all graphic display screens shall update the displayed values
using COV notifications if COV notification capabilities are available from the
data source.
c. The COV increment shall be adjustable by an operator using BACnet services.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 14
3.5 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS
A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the integration of multiple BACnet
networks, possibly on different LAN types, into a single BACnet internetwork.
1. Network Numbering:
a. Cornell BACnet network numbers are based on a "facility code, network" concept.
The "facility code" is the Cornell-assigned numeric value assigned to a specific
facility or building. See 3.03.A.2 above. The "network" typically corresponds to a
"floor" or other logical configuration within the building. BACnet allows 65535
network numbers per BACnet internetwork.
b. Cornell’s network numbers are thus formed as follows: Network Number =
"FFFFN" where:
1) FFFF = Facility Code
2) N = 0-9 This allows up to 10 networks per facility or building.
3) N = 0 will generally be assigned to a facility’s BACnet Ethernet LAN.
Normally, this network is connected to the campus backbone. The additional
N-numbers will be assigned to any ARCNET or MS/TP networks as
required.
c. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment, or
confirmation, of the Network Number(s) to be used prior to beginning device
configuration.
2. IP Address Assignments:
a. Cornell maintains specially configured VLANs for the purpose of securely
transporting BACS communication traffic. Address assignments are coordinated
by the Computer Section.
b. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment of IP addresses
(and possibly non-standard UDP ports) prior to beginning device configuration.
3.6 BACNET ROUTERS
A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet routers.
1. Error Message Destination: The Contractor shall configure each BACnet router to
transmit network layer (routing) error messages to the EMCS.
END OF SECTION 23 09 25
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1
SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.
3. Sheet metal materials.
4. Sealants and gaskets.
5. Hangers and supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,
and balancing requirements for metal ducts.
2. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1. Sealants and gaskets.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,
and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.
4. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts.
5. Fittings.
6. Reinforcement and spacing.
7. Seam and joint construction.
8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 2
10. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and
panels.
11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration
isolation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items
described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
2. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and
design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup."
D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 -
"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
E. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are
inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 3
2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-
pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and
other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with
Figure 2-1.
2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-
24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be
used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-
support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible." All longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock seams unless otherwise
specified for specific application.
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated
static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 4
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-
support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct
construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A1008/A1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed
ducts.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in
"Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B,
No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch- minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch-
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 5
B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified
acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight
seal.
2. Tape Width: 3 inches.
3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.
8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum.
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.
3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.
4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.
5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.
6. Water resistant.
7. Mold and mildew resistant.
8. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
9. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
10. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
2. Type: S.
3. Grade: NS.
4. Class: 25.
5. Use: O.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 6
F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be
rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings
and fitting spigots.
2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods
with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A603.
E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A492.
F. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts
designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and
coordination drawings.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 7
B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints.
D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
J. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in
air ducts where indicated on Drawings.
K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials
both before and after installation.
L. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.
1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes.
2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and
smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger.
M. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 8
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR LABORATORY EXHAUST AND
FUME HOOD EXHAUST DUCTS
A. Install ducts in accordance with NFPA 45, "Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals."
B. Install exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold water. Slope ducts a minimum of 2
percent back to hood or inlet. Where indicated on Drawings, install trapped drain piping.
C. Connect duct to fan, fume hood, and other equipment indicated on Drawings.
3.4 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A.
3. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports
within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 9
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.7 PAINTING
A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have
duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.
Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior
Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
3.9 STARTUP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
for HVAC."
3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:
1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as
indicated below.
2. Lab Hood Ducts: welded stainless steel.
B. Exhaust Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a. Pressure Class: Negative 3-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 4.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 4.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 10
2. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting Fume Hood, Laboratory, and Process
(ASHRAE 62.1, Class 3 and Class 4) Air:
a. Type 316, stainless-steel sheet.
1) Exposed to View: No. 4 finish.
2) Concealed: No. 2B finish.
b. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 4-inch wg.
c. Welded seams and joints.
d. Airtight/watertight.
C. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 11
3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-
1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have
proportionately fewer segments.
1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three
segments for 90-degree elbow.
2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments
for 90-degree elbow.
3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments
for 90-degree elbow.
4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Welded.
D. Branch Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in.
2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical
Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 23 31 13
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1
SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manual volume dampers.
2. Flange connectors.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounted access doors.
5. Duct accessory hardware.
6. Snorkel hood.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Access Doors: The manufacturer shall submit documentation of leakage tests performed in
accordance with AMCA Standard 500-D.
C. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
attachments to other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
c. Control-damper installations.
d. Fire-damper, installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors.
e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted
access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 2
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2
finish for concealed ducts and polished stainless-steel finish for exposed ducts.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d. McGill AirFlow LLC.
e. Nailor Industries Inc.
f. Ruskin Company.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 3
g. Trox USA Inc.
h. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.05-inch-thick
stainless steel to match system requirements.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized- or stainless-steel to match system material, 0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel, stainless steel, or nonferrous metal to match system
material.
7. Bearings:
a. Oil-impregnated bronze or oil-impregnated stainless-steel sleeve to match system
material.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 4
2.5 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. Elgen Manufacturing.
4. METALAIRE, Inc.
5. SEMCO Incorporated.
6. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into
vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E. Vane Construction: Double wall.
2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
3. Elgen Manufacturing.
4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. McGill AirFlow LLC.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. Ventfabrics, Inc.
B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 5
c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches.
d. Access Doors Larger than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct-insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
2.8 SNORKEL HOOD
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Movex "MET 1900-100" for ceiling mount and Movex "MET 1650-
100" for wall mount or approved equal.
B. Wall-Mounted or Ceiling-Mounted Adjustable Extractor Arm:
1. Arm: 4-inch diameter, with three adjustable points.
2. Duct Collar: 4 inches.
3. Mounting: Manufacturer's swiveling ceiling or wall-mounting bracket. Provide length of
ceiling bracket as required to penetrate ceiling and manufacturer's ceiling escutcheon.
4. Hood: 5-inch, clear-plastic dome hood.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts.
C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 6
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. Install steel
volume dampers in steel ducts.
D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters.
3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
4. At drain pans and seals.
5. Downstream from control dampers and equipment.
6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access
doors for access to fire dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors
and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and
inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
7. Control devices requiring inspection.
8. Elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
H. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
J. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
END OF SECTION 23 33 00
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 1
SECTION 23 33 46 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-insulated flexible ducts.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For flexible ducts.
1. Include plans showing locations and mounting and attachment details.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted
access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 2
C. Comply with the Air Diffusion Council's "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1."
D. Comply with ASTM E96/E96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials."
2.2 NON-INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. JP Lamborn Co.
3. McGill AirFlow LLC.
4. Thermaflex; a Flex-Tek Group company.
5. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Non-Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of stainless steel.
1. Pressure Rating: 12-inch wg positive or negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 5500 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 60 to plus 1500 deg F.
2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS
A. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear
action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork should not be exposed to UV lighting.
C. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not
use flexible ducts to change directions.
D. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
E. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 3
F. Installation:
1. Install ducts fully extended.
2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners.
3. Bends of flexible ducting shall not exceed a minimum of one duct diameter.
4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits.
5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line, without sags, twists, or turns.
G. Supporting Flexible Ducts:
1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1-1/2 inches wide or wider and spaced a maximum of
48 inches apart. Maximum centerline sag between supports shall not exceed 1/2 inch per
12 inches.
2. Install extra supports at bends placed approximately one duct diameter from center line of
the bend.
3. Ducts may rest on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall not
exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation instructions.
4. Vertically installed ducts shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72 inches
o.c.
END OF SECTION 23 33 46
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 1
SECTION 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Variable-volume air terminal units.
2. Critical environment control valve.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including sound power data.
B. The manufacturer shall submit documentation of leakage test reports performed in accordance
with ASHRAE Standard 130.
C. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VARIABLE-VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carrier.
2. Trane.
3. Price.
B. Leakage shall not exceed 4.5 cfm when test against a 1.0-inch w.c. pressure differential.
C. Completely factory-assembled unit shall consist of an insulated plenum with air-inlet collar, air-
volume damper, flow sensor, and removable access panel.
D. Unit casing shall be constructed of double-wall galvanized steel with 1/2-inch-thick, 2.0-pcf
(minimum), dual-density, thermal/acoustic glass-fiber insulation between walls. Insulation
material not to exceed NFPA 90A smoke- and flame-spread-rating recommendations and to
meet UL 181 anti-erosion requirements. Double-wall construction shall have 26-gauge
galvanized steel liner on the air-side surface of the insulation for complete metal encapsulation.
E. Air-volume dampers shall be factory-calibrated damper mechanism. Provide without
mechanical stops.
F. Air-volume controls shall be electric by means of an externally mounted 24-V actuator,
positioning the damper. Damper shall be normally closed.
G. Unit controllers and damper actuators are to be furnished by BACs subcontractor for installation
by unit manufacturer.
H. Air-volume limits shall be field adjustable to allow for future changes in unit airflow rates. Air-
volume limits will be based on the minimum pressure drop rating for the damper unit. For
damper with reset units, the minimum and maximum limits will be set at the reset device.
I. Each unit to be clearly marked with identification label and airflow indicator. Label shall
include model number, cfm, coil type, etc.
J. Hot-water heating coils shall be factory-mounted to unit in galvanized casing. Aluminum fins
shall be bonded to copper tubes. Coil to be leak-tested at 250-psi hydrostatic pressure.
K. Box sound power levels shall be as scheduled. Sound power-level rating of units shall be in
accordance with ADC Standard 1062.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 3
2.2 CRITICAL ENVIRONMENT CONTROL VALVE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
2. Phoenix Controls Corporation.
3. Price Industries.
4. Tuttle & Bailey; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products.
B. Description: Volume-damper or venturi assembly inside a unit casing with control components
inside a protective metal shroud, for general exhaust applications or for exhaust applications
where pressurization control via exhaust and supply airflow control is desired and airstream
corrosion and contamination may be a concern.
C. Casing:
1. Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
D. Airflow Metering, Option: Calibrated shaft position with self-adjusting, spring-loaded cone.
E. Sensors, Option: Multipoint, Type 316 stainless steel, removable.
F. Direct Digital Controls:
1. Terminal Unit Controller, Section 230923: Controller is to be factory mounted and wired
by air terminal manufacturer; unit controller, actuators, and room sensors are to be
furnished under Section 230923 "Building Automation Control System."
G. Control Sequence: See Drawings for control sequences.
2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized
rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
E. Air-Terminal-Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for
units with aluminum casings.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 4
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.
1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum
factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and
maintenance.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and
for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 5
2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.
END OF SECTION 23 36 00
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 1
SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fixed-face register.
2. Louver-face diffuser.
3. Linear slot diffuser.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for volume-control dampers not integral to
diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable product by
one of the following or approved equal:
1. Price.
2. Anemostat.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 2
2.2 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS
A. Fixed-Face Register RA:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core.
4. Core Construction: Removable.
5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
6. Face: 24 by 24 inches with blank-offs to reduce grille opening to 12 by 12 inches where
indicated on Drawings.
7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.
B. Louver-Face Diffuser SA:
1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches.
5. Mounting: Surface or T-bar—refer to Drawings.
6. Pattern: Adjustable core style.
7. Dampers: Radial opposed blade.
8. Accessories:
a. Square to round neck adaptor.
b. Adjustable pattern vanes.
c. Throw reducing vanes.
d. Equalizing grid.
e. Plaster ring.
f. Safety chain.
g. Wire guard.
h. Sectorizing baffles.
i. Operating rod extension.
C. Linear Slot Diffuser SB:
1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
2. Material - Shell: Aluminum.
3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.
4. Finish - Face: Special finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's catalog.
5. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black.
6. Slot Width: 1/2 inch.
7. Number of Slots: Three.
8. Length: 48 inches.
9. Accessories: Plenum, frame, and end caps as required for mounting in architectural
metal ceiling.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 3
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers and registers level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 37 13
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wire rated 600 V or less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer's authorized service representative.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with
an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Alpha Wire Company.
2. American Insulated Wire Corp.
3. Belden Inc.
4. Cerro Wire LLC.
5. Encore Wire Corporation.
6. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
7. Republic Wire Inc.
8. Southwire Company.
C. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
2. RoHS compliant.
3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's
"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with applicable
ASTM specifications for stranded conductors.
E. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type USE-2: Comply with UL 854.
2. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277.
3. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
4. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. 3M Electrical Products.
2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3
3. Gardner Bender.
4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
5. Ideal Industries, Inc.
6. ILSCO.
7. NSi Industries LLC.
8. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
9. TE Connectivity Ltd.
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Branch Circuits: Copper. Stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger.
B. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Stranded for No. 14 AWG and smaller.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E. Provide supports according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration
Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special
applications:
1. Electrical equipment grounding and bonding.
2. Communications equipment grounding and bonding.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.
3. ERICO International Corporation.
4. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.
5. ILSCO.
6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
7. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.
8. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 2
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
2.4 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual,
tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.
C. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.
D. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron.
E. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.
F. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 14 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 12 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 3
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1. Branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct
and connected metallic piping.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1
SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for electrical raceways and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for raceways, capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and system contents.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for the following:
a. Hangers.
b. Steel slotted support systems.
c. Trapeze hangers.
d. Equipment supports.
2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 2
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Structural members to which hangers and supports will be attached.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Speakers.
c. Access panels.
d. Projectors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame Rating: Class 1.
2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.
2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
b. B-line, an Eaton business.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. Flex-Strut Inc.
e. GS Metals Corp.
f. G-Strut.
g. Haydon Corporation.
h. Metal Ties Innovation.
i. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
j. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.
k. Wesanco, Inc.
2. Material: Galvanized steel.
3. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches.
4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-
4.
5. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 3
6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to
MFMA-4.
7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
8. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways
and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in
diameter.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
article.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
4. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with
MSS SP-69.
5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 4
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 40 00 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for
site-fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1
SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
4. In-wall storage boxes for audio-visual systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For all products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.
2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
4. Electri-Flex Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
7. Republic Conduit.
8. Southwire Company.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2
9. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
10. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
11. Wheatland Tube Company.
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Setscrew.
2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated
for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding
jumper.
I. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect
threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. B-line, an Eaton business.
2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.
3. MonoSystems, Inc.
4. Square D.
B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise
indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Adalet.
2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.
7. Hubbell Incorporated.
8. Kraloy.
9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.
10. MonoSystems, Inc.
11. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions.
12. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
13. Plasti-Bond.
14. RACO; Hubbell.
15. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
16. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
17. Wiremold / Legrand.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Metal Floor Boxes:
1. Material: Sheet metal.
2. Type: Fully adjustable.
3. Shape: Rectangular.
4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
I. Gangable boxes are allowed.
J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
K. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
2.4 IN-WALL STORAGE BOX FOR AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEMS
A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide Chief "PAC526FW" and "PAC526FCW" or approved
equal.
1. Refer to Drawings to quantities of each.
B. Equipment storage box recessed in-wall for audio visual equipment, typically installed behind a
wall-mounted flat panel display. Power outlet (not included with product), conduit, and data
network jacks (not included with product) typically attached to/installed inside box. Flange for
edge trim included. Contractor providing in-wall box shall also provide specified power outlets,
data jacks, conduit connections, and other accessories necessary to install the in-wall box. AV
Contractor shall provide AV connectors.
C. Color: White.
D. Switch Boxes for Electrical Outlet or Data Network Jacks:
1. Available Product: RACO #560.
2. 2.75 inches deep.
E. Acoustic Putty:
1. Available Product: Kinetics Noise Control IsoBacker.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 5
F. Accessories:
1. Provide all fasteners, hardware, anchors, brackets, and other components to ensure
complete, functional, and secure installation of all products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations include the
following:
a. Mechanical rooms.
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless
steel or nonmetallic in wet locations.
B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this
type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and
apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of
changes in direction.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
P. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 7
2. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
Q. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of
flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration,
noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
R. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to
top of box unless otherwise indicated.
S. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
T. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
U. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
V. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
W. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
X. In-Wall Storage Box for Audio-Visual Systems:
1. General:
a. Install all systems to comply with NFPS Section 70 National Electric Code, and
local/state codes, ordinances, regulations, recommendations, guidelines and
directives, in a manner which complies with accepted industry standards of good
practice, the requirements of this specification, and in a manner which does not
constitute a life or physical safety hazard.
b. Comply with manufacturer’s written data and specifications, including product
technical bulletins, installation instructions, and technical data sheets.
c. Install all products at locations and heights indicated on Drawings.
d. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.
e. Metal raceway shall be electrically continuous and bonded in accordance with the
National Electric Code for proper grounding.
f. Raceway systems shall be mechanically continuous and connected to all electrical
outlets, boxes, device mounting brackets, and cabinets, in accordance with
manufacturer’s installation sheets.
g. All products described in this specification shall be installed plumb and square
unless specifically detailed otherwise.
h. All supports shall meet or exceed the load requirements of the intended application
with a minimum safety factor of five.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 8
i. Where penetrations of fire-rated assemblies are involved, the Contractor shall seal
penetrations with appropriate firestopping systems in accordance with Section
07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
j. The Contractor shall investigate the presence of post-tension rods before drilling
into concrete floors/ceilings.
2. In-wall box interior shall remain open and clear of obstructions to allow for installation of
audio-visual system devices. This includes but is not limited to power outlets, data
network jacks, and conduit stubs. In accordance with manufacturer instructions, power
outlets and data network jacks shall be installed on the outside of the in-wall box facing
inward.
3. In-wall box shall be secured to the building structure per manufacturer instructions.
Conduit shall not bear the weight of the in-wall box.
4. Conduit shall terminate on the in-wall box. No free air cable runs from conduit to box.
5. Included flange shall be installed to conceal rough-cut of finished wall material.
6. Conduit containing AC power cables shall terminate at the in-wall box on the opposite
side of the box from conduit containing low voltage audio visual system cables.
7. Conduit ends shall not have sharp edges, or have an insulated bushing installed to protect
wire pulls from damage.
8. Conduit to the in-wall box intended for low-voltage audio-visual systems may not be
shared by other trades or services, except by written consent from the Owner’s
Representative.
9. Do not install in-wall storage boxes back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6-inch
separation. Install with minimum 24-inch separation in acoustic-rated walls.
10. In-wall box shall be installed flush with finished wall material.
11. Acoustical treatment to be installed behind in-wall storage box: The complete outside
surface of each of these in-wall storage boxes shall be treated with acoustical putty.
12. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate with AV Contractor for installation of AV
connectors in-wall boxes.
3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1
SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for conductors.
2. Warning labels and signs.
3. Equipment identification labels.
4. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Use consistent designations
throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 2
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
3. Arc Flash Protection Label:
a. Items: Arc Flash Protection Label.
b. Type: Format 9.
c. Color: White on red header/black on white body.
d. Height: 5 inches.
e. Width: 7 inches.
f. Legend: “DANGER – ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD, APPROPRIATE
PPE REQUIRED, HAZARD CATEGORY -1.”
g. Material: Write-on vinyl with acrylic adhesive.
2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
C. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
D. Stenciled Legend: In non-fading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall
be 1 inch.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 3
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location
(exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-
adhesive warning labels.
1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
2. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
B. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-
1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches high.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 4
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive,
engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1
SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 27 Specifications for data outlets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRING DEVICES
A. Where Basis-of-Design Product is indicated below, provide named product or approved equal
by one of the following Bryant, Cooper (Arrow-Hart), Hubbell, P&S, or Leviton. Provide one
manufacturer for each category, for entire Project.
B. Receptacles–General Usage:
1. General Requirements: Duplex, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding.
a. 20 Amp, 125 volts, 60 Hz.
b. NEMA configuration: 5-20R.
c. Parallel-blade, double-wipe contacts; NEMA grounding slot.
d. UL-listed and meeting Federal Specification WC596.
2. Standard:
a. Quick-connect “plugtail” type.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT5362 series.
3. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs), Specification grade, feed through
a. Trip level: 4 to 6 mA; trip time: .025 second nominal.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT2095 series.
4. TVSS:
a. Same as paragraph 3 above except TVSS.
5. Duplex tamper-resistant receptacles with two USB charging ports, 15-A rating.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #TMB26USBLACC6.
6. Special-Purpose Receptacles:
a. Sizes and NEMA ratings as indicated on Contract Drawings.
C. Wall Plates:
1. Interior for Recessed Outlet Boxes:
a. Finished Spaces:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3
1) Brushed aluminum.
2) Single multi-gang plate for multiple devices at one location.
3) Manufacturer: Same as devices.
2. Interior for Surface Steel Outlet Boxes:
a. Galvanized sheet steel; rounded edges.
b. Single multi-gang plate for multiple devices at one location.
c. Manufacturer: Appleton, General Electric, Pyle National, Steel City, Universal.
3. Weatherproof:
a. GFCI receptacle, with cover; wet location-rated while in use. Provide at all
exterior locations, at all interior wet locations, and as indicated on Contract
Drawings.
b. Manufacturers: Taymac, Carlon, P&S.
2.2 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Grey.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency/Standby Power System: Red.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
1. Duplex Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor to centerline.
2. Outlets above Counter: 42 inches above finished floor; coordinate with Architectural
elevations and counter installation.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4
C. The location of any device box may be changed a distance of 10 feet from starting location
before device is actually installed, at no extra charge.
D. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
E. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
F. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the left.
G. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multi-gang wall plates.
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is
not required.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 5
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units, and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 1
SECTION 27 15 00 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. UTP cabling.
2. Cable connecting hardware.
3. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.
4. Cabling system identification products.
B. Scope of Work:
1. Provide all necessary computer-data-distribution-system cabling and other associated
devices, components, and accessories as required for the system specified herein and as
indicated in the Contract Drawings.
2. Provide horizontal copper cabling and outlets.
3. Provide Category 6 data jacks and Category 6, unshielded, twisted-pair, copper cables to
Category 6 voice/data outlets (RJ45).
4. Provide Category 6A data jacks and Category 6A, unshielded, twisted-pair, copper cable
for each wireless access point.
5. Remove all existing unused cabling back to source.
6. Cable trays and pull boxes shall remain accessible.
7. Coordinate any disruptions in service with Cornell University CIT and building-area
occupants.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
D. LAN: Local area network.
E. Outlet: A connecting point in the work area on which horizontal cable terminates to a jack.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 2
F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The following industry standards are the basis for ALL of the structured cabling described in
this document. This includes the most recent revision of TIA standards for Category 6/6A
Cable Installation and Testing, Pathways and Spaces, and Grounding. The list is incorporated
by this reference to them. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, the order below
shall dictate the order of precedence in resolving the issue unless an enforceable local or
national code is in effect. Note that specific reference is made to both the EIA/TIA 568-B.2.1
standard for category 6 cabling and the EIA/TIA 568-B.3 standard for fiber optics.
1. TIA/EIA—Pertinent Sections
2. TIA/EIA-568-B and B3, Commercial Building Telecommunication Cabling Standard
3. TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunication Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings
4. TIA/EIA-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements
5. TIA/EIA-569-A, Commercial Building Standards for Telecom Pathways and Spaces
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA-70 National Electric Code (NEC) – 2002 (or later edition)
7. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations.
8. OSHA (Standards 29 CRF) Telecommunications – 1910.268.
9. Underwriters Laboratory.
B. National Electrical Safety Code Board of Fire Underwriters inspection is required for all new
electrical construction work. Specific Cornell Fire and Safety requirements must be met. In the
event of conflict between or among such codes/requirements, the more stringent will apply.
1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's
telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet locations with location of power receptacles at each work
area.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. At the time of Shop Drawings, submit applicable manufacturer’s literature, Shop Drawings, and
Product Data to confirm the conformance to the Contract Documents.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 3
B. Product Data for each component specified including detailed manufacturer specifications.
Include data on features, ratings, and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation
views of components as needed. Show access and working-space requirements.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transmission media certifying that the
products furnished comply with requirements and that they have been coordinated with and
accepted by manufacturer of connected equipment.
D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Provide evidence of applicable registration or
certification at time of contract award. No projection of certifications will be accepted.
E. Collect and submit any accompanying identification attached to every master reel of unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) cable.
F. Submit, prior to testing, the most recent calibration reports for all testing devices used by the
contractor performing the testing. Calibration reports older than those recommended by the
cabling or device manufacturer will be rejected.
G. Submit a label example, pertaining to this project, for approval prior to printing bulk labels.
H. Final schedule of cables as specified in Part 3.
I. As-Built Drawings:
1. As-built Contract Drawing shall be delivered to the Owner 2 weeks prior to occupancy
for each Project phase. A set of as-built drawings shall be provided to the Owner in
electronic CAD software that is acceptable to the Owner. Provide as-built drawings with
locations, cable paths, and cable schedule for Cornell University (CU) cable records.
J. Project Record Drawings:
1. Submit at conclusion of the Project and include:
a. Approved Shop Drawings.
b. Plan Contract Drawings indicating locations and identification of work area
outlets, nodes, closets, and backbone (riser) cable runs.
c. Cross-connect schedules including entrance point, main cross-connects,
intermediate cross-connects, and horizontal cross-connects.
d. Labeling and administration documentation.
e. Warranty documents for equipment.
f. Copper certification test result printouts and CD.
g. Operation and maintenance manuals.
K. Test Reports--General:
1. Provide a complete system test report (bound) of the complete existing data network at
each building prior to starting work.
2. Provide a complete system test report (bound) of the additions and revisions to the
existing data network. After the report is acceptable, upon Engineer’s review, the report
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 4
shall be included in the Division 27 O&M manual. Also, the acceptable test report shall
be submitted to the on compact disk in PDF format.
3. Refer to Article 3.6 of this Section for additional information.
L. The Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings, product data, and samples shall not relieve the
Division 27 Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, product data,
and samples.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections, and incidental items necessary to
fully complete the work under this Contract for use, occupancy, and operation by the Owner.
B. Unless specifically otherwise indicated by the documents or the CM/Owner, all equipment and
materials required for installation under these specifications shall be new, unused, and without
blemish or defect. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the
acceptance of the Authorities having jurisdiction over the work and as specified hereinbefore.
Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products listed and/or labeled by FM or
UL or another testing laboratory, the products shall be so listed and/or labeled. Where no
specific indication as to the type or quality of material or equipment is indicated, a first-class
standard article shall be provided.
C. Where equipment of a substitute manufacturer differ from that specified and require different
arrangement or connections from those shown or specified, it is the responsibility of the
Contractor responsible for the substitution to modify the installation of the equipment/system to
operate properly and in harmony with the original intent of the drawings and specifications.
When directed by the Architect, this Contractor shall submit drawings showing the proposed
substitute installation. If the proposed installation is accepted this Contractor shall make all
necessary changes in all affected related work provided under his and other Sections including
roughing-in connections by other Trades, conduits, supports, etc. All changes shall be made at
no increase to the Contract amount or additional costs to the Owner.
D. Contractor/Subcontractor Qualifications: The Contractor/Subcontractor shall have at least one
Registered Communications Distribution Designer, RCDD, on staff that must be certified by the
Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI). Cabling installation shall be
performed by a minimum of two installers and all installers performing the Work of this
Contract shall be manufacturer-certified installers with proof of a current certification. All
installers must be approved by the Owner prior to contract award.
E. Contractor/Subcontractor shall be Corning EWP-certified for at least 6 months at time of bid for
fiber-optic installations. Evidence of this certification must be presented to Owner with bid
submission.
F. Contractor/Subcontractor shall be part Panduit-certified for copper horizontal cabling
installations. Evidence of this certification must be presented to Owner with bid submission.
G. Fiber-optic-trained technicians shall have attended an appropriate training program and have
obtained a certificate as proof shall execute the fiber-optic tests. Such certificates may have
been issued by any of the following organizations or an equivalent organization:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 5
1. The manufacturer of the fiber-optic cable and/or the fiber-optic connectors,
2. The manufacturer of the test equipment used for the field certification,
3. Training organizations authorized by BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Services
International with headquarters in Tampa, Florida) or by the ACP (Association of
Cabling Professionals™) Cabling Business Institute located in Dallas, Texas.
H. Inspect every cable reel to confirm that the cable manufacturer has ISO9001 certification, that
there are no factory splices in any reel, and that only virgin materials were used in the
manufacturing of each reel. Reject any reels that do not comply with these criteria.
I. Cable manufacturers shall be ISO 9001 registered.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Attention is directed to provisions of the General Requirements regarding the warranties for
work under this contract.
B. All materials, items of equipment, and workmanship furnished under this Section shall carry the
standard warranty against all defects in material and workmanship. Any fault due to defective
or improper material, equipment, workmanship, or design that may develop shall be made good,
forthwith, by, and at the expense of this contractor for the work under his contract including all
other damage to areas, materials, and other systems resulting from this failure.
C. Materials and labor supplied will be warranted against defects for a period of not less than one
year following final acceptance. Materials, equipment, and cable installations found to be
defective, as judged by the Owner, within the one-year period will be replaced by the contractor
at no charge to the Owner. The contractor is required to respond to a repair call no later than the
next business day.
D. Provide cable manufacturer's warranty naming CIT/Infrastructure Engineering as the Owner.
1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Project before, during, and after
installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Use all means necessary to coordinate with other trades and ensure that proper and adequate
provision is made in the work of other Sections to accommodate installations of the work of this
Section.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 6
B. Adjust the arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross connects
in telecommunication rooms to accommodate and optimize the arrangement and space
requirements of the telephone switch and LAN equipment.
C. Coordinate with and obtain review of cable characteristics and certification for use with the
connected system equipment by the connected equipment manufacturers.
D. Collect and submit any accompanying identification, if any, attached to every master reel of
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. Inspection of every reel should confirm that the cable
manufacturer has ISO9001 certification, that there are no factory splices in any reel, and that
only virgin materials were used in the manufacturing of each reel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet from data room rack to outlet. This
maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet for patch
cords and service loops.
B. Cable slack shall be provided at each end of each cable to accommodate future work-area
changes.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
TIA/EIA-568-D when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A and NFPA 70.
2.3 UTP CABLE
A. Category 6 Cable:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CommScope
"Systimax" #1071E or comparable product by one of the following:
a. BerkTek Lanmark #XTP.
b. Panduit GenSpeed #6000.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 7
B. Category 6A Cable:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CommScope
"Systimax" #1091B or comparable product by BerkTek Lanmark #XTP.
2.4 CABLE HARDWARE
A. Outlet Faceplates:
1. Work-area faceplates shall be compatible with modular jack inserts iconable and ivory in
color. Faceplates shall have a covered designation strips that allow identifying each jack.
Provide inserts that orient outlets to accept jack inserts at 45-degree exit.
a. Product—No Substitution: Panduit "Mini-Com Executive" series #CBEEI.
b. Refer to Contract Drawings for exact quantity, number of ports required, and
location of faceplates.
2. Blanks shall be installed to all unused openings.
B. Category 6 Jacks and Inserts:
1. TIA 568A termination procedures shall be observed. Verify with Owner’s
Representative prior to install.
2. Cable jacket shall be maintained to the point of termination.
3. Pair twists shall be maintained to within .5" of termination.
4. Excessive slack shall be removed from cables so as to avoid overcrowding behind
faceplates and exceeding recommended bend radius.
5. Product—No Substitution: Panduit #CJ688TG.
C. Category 6A Modular Jacks:
1. Product—No Substitution: Panduit #CJ6X88TG, T568A modular jack for Cat. 6A cables.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING METHODS
A. Conceal cables in raceway.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 8
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Install TG termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point.
5. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations
only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
6. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches
and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and
terminals.
7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling
Termination Practices" Chapter.
8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end
of cable. Horizontal cable shall route in front/rear vertical and horizontal cable
managers.
11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull
tensions.
C. UTP Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain
cable geometry.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.
B. Label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and CIT
Infrastructure standards.
C. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing
cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic
cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point
labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets,
backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions,
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 9
horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and
pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish
electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.
E. Cable and Wire Identification:
1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a
cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at
device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within
panel or cabinet.
3. Identification within Connector Fields in Wiring Closet: Label each connector and each
discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.
4. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work
area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.
F. Label each outlet using the CU labelling convention: Room number-alpha (clockwise around
room)-port; e.g., 101-A1, 2.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification
markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for
compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for
compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and
patch panels.
3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment
and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent
faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection
blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-
B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in
"Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy
specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords
and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link
test configuration.
5. UTP Performance Tests:
a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to
TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 10
1) Wire map.
2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).
3) Insertion loss.
4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
8) Return loss.
9) Propagation delay.
10) Delay skew.
6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems
after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are
installed.
a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect
to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen
and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long
distance, and digital subscription line telephone call.
b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network
installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface
device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection
to the network.
B. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report
that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to
the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 27 15 00